Lexus LS600H Owner's manual

Lexus LS600H Owner's manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Before driving
Information on the hybrid system and adjusting and operating
features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle
specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt and
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners.
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index
For information regarding the equipment listed below, refer to the “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”.
• Navigation system
1
Before driving
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system................................... 36
1-2. Key information
Keys ...................................................... 49
1-3. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start .......................... 54
Wireless remote control .............. 67
Doors.................................................... 70
Trunk..................................................... 75
1-4. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats.......................................... 82
Power rear seat............................... 88
Driving position memory ............ 98
Rear seat position memory....... 104
Head restraints............................... 106
Seat belts .......................................... 109
Steering wheel.................................. 116
2
• Audio/video system
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror ................................................ 117
Outside rear view mirrors........... 119
1-5. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows................................ 121
Moon roof ........................................ 124
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap......... 128
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ...................... 133
Alarm.................................................. 135
1-8. Safety information
Correct driving posture ............. 138
SRS airbags ..................................... 140
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................. 153
Child restraint systems ............... 158
Installing child restraints............. 163
2
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle........................ 174
Power (ignition) switch ............... 184
EV drive mode ............................... 188
Transmission ................................... 190
Turn signal lever ............................ 195
Parking brake ................................. 196
Brake Hold....................................... 199
Horn.................................................... 201
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters .................... 202
Indicators and warning
lights................................................ 207
Multi-information display............. 211
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ............................... 233
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................................ 237
1
Intuitive parking assist ............... 250
LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist)........... 258
Electronically modulated
2
air suspension ............................. 265
Advanced parking guidance
system ............................................ 267
Driving assist systems................ 308
3
Pre-Collision System................... 315
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage..................... 326 4
Vehicle load limits........................ 329
Winter driving tips ........................ 331
Trailer towing................................. 335
Dinghy towing ............................... 336 5
Headlight switch............................ 216
Automatic High Beam............... 220
Fog light switch ............................. 226
Windshield wipers and
washer............................................ 228
Headlight cleaner switch .......... 232
6
7
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
Index
Interior features
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen ................................ 338
Set up screen ................................ 339
Information screen ..................... 340
3-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front air conditioning
system ............................................. 341
Rear air conditioning
system ........................................... 355
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers....................... 363
Windshield wiper de-icer......... 364
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list........................... 365
• Interior lights ............................... 366
• Personal lights ............................ 367
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features............... 369
• Glove box...................................... 371
• Coin holder.................................. 372
• Door pockets.............................. 372
• Cup holders................................. 373
• Console box................................ 374
• Non smokers boxes................. 376
• Auxiliary boxes........................... 377
4
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors........................................ 380
Vanity mirrors................................. 381
Outside temperature
display ........................................... 382
Ashtrays .......................................... 383
Cigarette lighters........................ 384
Power outlets................................ 386
Heated steering wheel.............. 389
Climate control
seats/seat heaters...................... 391
Armrest ........................................... 395
Retractable table.......................... 396
Rear sunshade.............................. 398
Rear door sunshades................... 401
Coat hooks ..................................... 404
Floor mat......................................... 405
Trunk features............................... 406
Garage door opener................. 408
Safety Connect .............................. 414
4
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior................... 422
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.................... 425
5
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
1
Emergency flashers .................... 496
If your vehicle needs to
be towed....................................... 497
If you think something
2
is wrong........................................ 503
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements ..... 428
General maintenance............... 430
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ...................................... 433
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions.................................. 434
Hood.................................................. 437
Positioning a floor jack.............. 438
Engine compartment.................. 440
12-volt battery................................ 452
Tires ................................................... 456
Tire inflation pressure................. 465
Wheels.............................................. 469
Air conditioning filter................... 471
Electronic key battery................ 474
Checking and replacing
fuses................................................ 476
Headlight aim ................................ 482
Light bulbs....................................... 484
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... ....................................... 504
If a warning message is
displayed........................................ 514
If you have a flat tire...................... 517
If the hybrid system will not
start ................................................. 526
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P” ......................... 528
If the parking brake cannot
be released .................................. 529
If the electronic key does
not operate properly ................ 531
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged .................................. 535
If your vehicle overheats ........... 539
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................................ 543
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency...... 544
5
3
4
5
6
7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
Index
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)..................... 546
Fuel information........................... 559
Tire information............................. 562
6-2. Customization
Customizable features............... 573
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners.......................... 584
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)................................... 585
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 587
6
Index
Abbreviation list................................... 598
Alphabetical index .............................. 600
What to do if... .........................................612
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
Pictorial index
Windshield wipers P. 228
Exterior
Moon roof P. 124
Outside rear view
mirrors P. 119
Hood P. 437
Turn signal lights P. 195
Side marker lights P. 216
Fog lights P. 226
Headlights and daytime
running lights P. 216, 218
Turn signal lights P. 195
Parking lights P. 216
Side marker lights P. 216
8
Fuel filler door P. 128
Turn signal lights P. 195
Rear window defogger
P. 363
Doors P. 70
Trunk P. 75
License plate lights
Tires
P. 456
●Rotation
P. 517
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure P. 556
P. 562
●Information
P. 216
Tail lights P. 216
Side marker lights P. 216
9
Pictorial index
Front interior
Seat belts P. 109
SRS driver airbag P. 140
Head restraints P. 106
SRS knee airbags P. 140
Door pockets P. 372
SRS front
passenger airbag P. 140
A
Power outlets P. 386
AUX port *
USB port *
A/V input port *
SRS side airbags P. 140
Ashtrays  P. 383
Cigarette lighter  P. 384
Non smokers boxes  P. 376
Cup holders P. 373
Transmission shift lever P. 190
Console box P. 374
Front seats P. 82
10
Shift lock override button P. 528
A
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 117
Interior lights P. 366
Personal lights P. 367
Moon roof switches P. 124
Garage door opener switches P. 408
“SOS” button P. 414
SRS curtain shield airbags P. 140
Sun visors P. 380
Vanity mirrors P. 381
Auxiliary boxes P. 377
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
11
Pictorial index
Front interior
B
Inside lock buttons P. 70
Driving position memory switches P. 98
Shoulder anchor control switch
P. 110
Window lock switch P. 121
Door lock switch P. 70
Power window switches P. 121
12
C
Without rear console display
Driving mode selector switch P. 191
VSC off switch
P. 310
Electronically modulated air
suspension switches P. 265
Rear door sunshade switch  P. 401
Rear sunshade switch P. 398
Rear seat heater switch 
P. 391
Rear climate control seat
switch  P. 391
Rear seat return switch 
P. 91
Front climate control seat
switches P. 391
With rear console display
VSC off switch
P. 310
Driving mode selector switch P. 191
Electronically modulated air
suspension switches P. 265
Front passenger’s power seat switches P. 83
Rear door sunshade switch
P. 401
Rear climate control seat
switch P. 391
Rear seat return switch
P. 91
Rear sunshade switch
P. 398
Front climate control seat
switches P. 391
: If equipped
13
Pictorial index
Headlight switch P. 216
Turn signal lever P. 195
Fog light switch P. 226
Horn P. 201
Instrument panel
Gauges and meters P. 202
Multi-information display P. 211
Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 228
Power (ignition) switch P. 184
Trunk opener main
switch P. 76
Floor mat
P. 405
Glove box P. 371
Buzzer volume adjustment knob P. 58
Tire pressure warning reset switch P. 457
Hood release
lever P. 437
Pre-collision braking off switch  P. 316
Parking brake switches P. 196
Trunk opener P. 75
Fuel filler door opener P. 128
14
A
Outside rear view mirror switches P. 119
Instrument panel light control buttons P. 204
Headlight cleaner switch P. 232
Tilt and telescopic steering
control switch P. 116
“AFS OFF” switch P. 218
Intuitive parking assist switch P. 250
Heated steering wheel switch P. 389
“ECO MODE” switch P. 191
EV drive mode switch P. 188
: If equipped
15
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
B
Without LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
Talk switch P. 343 *
Audio remote control
switches *
Brake hold switch P. 199
APGS pre-support switch P. 269
“DISP” switch P. 212
“RESET” switch P. 212
Telephone switch *
Cruise control switch
P. 233, 237
Distance switch  P. 237
With LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
Talk switch P. 343 *
Audio remote control
switches *
Brake hold switch P. 199
APGS pre-support switch P. 269
“DISP” switch P. 212
“RESET” switch P. 212
Telephone switch *
Cruise control switch
P. 233, 237
Distance switch  P. 237
16
“LKA” switch P. 258
C
Clock *
Emergency flasher
switch P. 496
Touch screen P. 338
Navigation system *
Air conditioning
system P. 341
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers
Audio system *
P. 363
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
17
Pictorial index
Rear interior
(5-seat models without relaxation seat)
Seat position memory
switches  P. 104
Auxiliary boxes P. 377
Power window
switches P. 121
SRS side airbags 
P. 140
Head restraints P. 106
A
Seat belts P. 109
Cup holders P. 373
Pelvic support seat controller 
P. 88
Rear seat entertainment system
controller *
18
Non smokers boxes  P. 376
Ashtrays  P. 383
Cigarette lighters  P. 384
Power outlets  P. 386
A
Interior lights P. 366
Personal lights P. 367
Rear seat entertainment system *
SRS curtain shield
airbags P. 140
Vanity mirrors P. 381
Coat hooks P. 404
Rear audio switches *
B
Power seat
switches  P. 88
Seat heater
switches  P. 391
Rear air conditioning
switches  P. 355
Rear climate control
seat switches 
P. 391
Rear door sunshade
switches  P. 401
Rear sunshade switch
P. 398
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
19
Pictorial index
Rear interior
(5-seat models with relaxation seat)
Seat position memory switches P. 104
Power window
switches P. 121
Head restraints P. 106
SRS side airbag
P. 140
A
Non smokers boxes  P. 376
Ashtrays  P. 383
Cup holders P. 373
Seat belts P. 109
20
SRS seat cushion airbag P. 140
A
Interior lights P. 366
Personal lights P. 367
Vanity mirrors P. 381
SRS curtain shield airbags P. 140
Coat hooks P. 404
B
Headphone jacks *
Rear seat entertainment
system controller *
Rear seat relaxation system/
pelvic support seat controller
P. 88
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
21
Pictorial index
Rear interior
(5-seat models with relaxation seat)
C
Rear audio switches *
Power seat switches
P. 88
Rear climate control
seat switches P. 391
Rear air conditioning
switches P. 355
Rear door sunshade
switches P. 401
Rear sunshade switch
22
P. 398
D
Rear seat entertainment system *
DVD player *
Auxiliary boxes P. 377
A/V input port *
Power outlets P. 386
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
23
Pictorial index
DVD player *
Headphone jacks *
Rear interior
(4-seat models)
Seat position memory
switches P. 104
Power window
switches P. 121
SRS side airbags
Head restraints
P. 106
P. 140
A
Seat belts P. 109
Non smokers box  P. 376
Ashtray  P. 383
Power outlets  P. 386
Cup holders P. 373
SRS seat cushion airbag P. 140
Auxiliary boxes P. 377
24
A
Interior lights P. 366
Personal lights P. 367
Rear seat entertainment system *
SRS curtain shield
airbags P. 140
Vanity mirrors P. 381
Coat hooks P. 404
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
25
Pictorial index
Rear interior
(4-seat models)
B
A/V input port *
Cigarette lighters  P. 384
Power outlets  P. 386
Rear seat entertainment system
controller *
Rear seat relaxation system/
pelvic support seat controller
P. 88
Auxiliary boxes P. 377
26
C
Retractable table lock release lever P. 396
Rear sunshade switch P. 398
Rear door sunshade switches P. 401
Rear air conditioning
switches P. 355
Rear air conditioning
switches P. 355
Rear audio switches *
Rear climate control
seat switches
P. 391
Power seat switches P. 88
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
27
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system
Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
28
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:
● Hybrid system
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same
amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or
home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding.
Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
29
Vehicle control and operation data recording
Your Lexus is equipped with sophisticated computers that record certain information about your vehicle’s operation, such as:
• Engine speed
• Motor speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The data recorded varies according to the grade level and options the vehicle is
equipped with. The computers do not record conversations, sound or pictures.
● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
30
● Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data recorder
(EDR) that records data in a crash or near crash event.
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or near crash event,
this device may record the following information:
• Engine speed
• Whether the brake pedal was depressed or not
• Vehicle speed
• To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
• The transmission shift position
• Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
• Driver’s seat position
• SRS airbag deployment data
• SRS airbag system diagnostic data
• Front passenger’s occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle
safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound
data such as conversation between passengers.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased
vehicle) is obtained
• Officially requested to by the police or other authorities
• Necessary, for use as a defense for Lexus in a lawsuit
• Ordered to by a court of law
However, if necessary, Lexus will:
• Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details
of the vehicle owner, and that only when deemed necessary
• Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a nonLexus organization for research purposes
31
● Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to
those services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette
lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
■ Dispose of the hybrid battery (traction battery)
If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there
is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event of that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid
battery must be disposed of your Lexus dealer or a qualified service shop. If the
hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, they may cause electric shock that can
result in death or serious injury.
32
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause injury to people. You
are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury
to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to
avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).
33
34
Before driving
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system ............................ 36
1
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror......................................... 117
Outside rear view mirrors..... 119
1-2. Key information
Keys............................................... 49
1-3. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk
Smart access system
with push-button start........... 54
Wireless remote control......... 67
Doors ............................................ 70
1-5. Opening and closing
the windows and
moon roof
Power windows......................... 121
Moon roof ................................. 124
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap............................................ 128
Trunk ............................................. 75
1-7. Theft deterrent system
1-4. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats.................................. 82
Immobilizer system ................ 133
Alarm.......................................... 135
1-8. Safety information
Power rear seat......................... 88
Correct driving posture ....... 138
Driving position memory....... 98
SRS airbags .............................. 140
Rear seat position
memory ................................... 104
Front passenger occupant
classification system............ 153
Head restraints ........................ 106
Child restraint systems ......... 158
Seat belts ................................... 109
Installing child restraints....... 163
Steering wheel.......................... 116
35
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics
of your vehicle, and operate with care.
The hybrid system combines a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and
reducing exhaust emissions.
Gasoline engine
Electric motor (Traction motor)
■ When stopped/during start-off
The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During startoff, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow
speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped
and the motor is used.
36
1-1. Hybrid system
■ During normal driving
The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor
(traction motor) charges the hybrid battery as necessary.
1
Before driving
■ When accelerating sharply
The power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added via electric motor (traction motor) to that of the gasoline engine.
■ When braking (Regenerative braking)
The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
■ Regenerative braking
The motor generator converts kinetic energy to electric energy when:
● The accelerator pedal is released.
● The brake pedal is depressed with the shift lever in “D”, “S” or “R”.
■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:
● The gasoline engine is warming up.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is being charged.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) temperature is low or high.
37
1-1. Hybrid system
■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
● As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery
does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is
left parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30
minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and
you are unable to jump-start the vehicle with the 12-volt battery, contact your
Lexus dealer.
● If the shift lever is in “N”, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be
charged. When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in
“D” or “S” to avoid discharging the battery.
● To help prevent the 12-volt battery from becoming discharged, drive the vehicle
at least once a month, and operate the accessories only when the “READY”
indicator is on. When parking the vehicle, make sure the doors and trunk are
closed and all lights are turned off.
■ Charging the 12-volt battery
P. 536
■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed
The gasoline engine may idle at times when it usually would not. The vehicle idles
continuously in order to re-learn the engine operating conditions and this does not
indicate a malfunction. If this continues for more than a few days, contact your Lexus
dealer.
38
1-1. Hybrid system
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
39
1
Before driving
There may be no engine sounds or vibrations even though the vehicle is able to
move. Always put the shift lever in “P” when parked.
The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating,
and are not a malfunction:
● Motor sounds may be heard from under the vehicle.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear
seat when the hybrid system starts or stops.
● Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the hybrid system starts or
stops.
● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
● Sounds may be heard due to energy regeneration when you depress the brake
pedal.
● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
● You may hear cooling fan sounds coming from the air intake vents behind the
rear seat.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) cooling
The air conditioning system may operate automatically to cool the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal
Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal.
Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.
1-1. Hybrid system
High voltage components
Power control unit
Electric motor (Traction motor)
High voltage cables (orange
color)
Hybrid battery (Traction battery)
DC/DC converter
Service plug
Air conditioning compressor
Caution label
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high voltage
system (about 650V at maximum) as well as parts that become
extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the caution
labels attached to the vehicle.
40
1-1. Hybrid system
■ Hybrid battery air vents
Emergency shut off system
The emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and
stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage
when a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor. If the
emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To
restart the hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer.
Energy monitor/consumption screen
You can view the status of your
hybrid system on the multi-information display (P. 211) and the
touch screen (P. 338). The following images are examples only,
and may vary slightly from actual
conditions.
41
1
Before driving
There are air intake vents on the
package tray for the purpose of
cooling the hybrid battery (traction
battery). If the vents become
blocked, the hybrid battery may
overheat, leading to a reduction in
hybrid battery output.
1-1. Hybrid system
■ Energy monitor
● How to display on the touch screen:
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press “INFO/PHONE” beside the touch screen.
Touch “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.
If the “Energy Monitor” screen does not appear, touch “Energy”.
● How to display on the multi-information display:
Press the “DISP” switch on the steering wheel several times to select
the energy monitor display.
Touch screen
When the vehicle is
powered by the
electric motor
(traction motor)
When the vehicle is
powered by both
the gasoline engine
and the electric
motor (traction
motor)
When the vehicle is
powered by the
gasoline engine
42
Multi-information
display
1-1. Hybrid system
Multi-information
display
Touch screen
1
Before driving
When the vehicle is
charging the hybrid
battery (traction
battery)
When there is no
energy flow
Hybrid battery
(traction battery)
status
Low
Full
Low
Full
43
1-1. Hybrid system
■ Consumption
STEP 1 Press “INFO/PHONE” beside the touch screen.
STEP 2 Touch “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.
If the “Consumption” screen does not appear, touch “Consumption”.
Fuel consumption in the past 30
minutes
Regenerated energy in the past
30 minutes
One symbol indicates 30 Wh. Up
to 4 symbols are shown.
Cruising range
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ Past record
STEP 1 Press “INFO/PHONE” beside the touch screen.
STEP 2 Touch “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.
If the “Past Record” screen does not appear, touch “Past Record”.
Best past fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption between each reset of
the average fuel consumption on
the multi-information display.
When resetting, if the average consumption is better than the best
past fuel consumption will be
updated.
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ Resetting the consumption data
Selecting “Clear” on the “Consumption” screen will reset the average fuel consumption. Selecting “Clear” on the “Past Record” screen will reset the past records.
Selecting “Yes” will confirm resetting of all the data (except cruising range).
44
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid warning message
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the
hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.
■ If a warning light comes on or a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt bat-
tery is disconnected
The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the
“READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ When refueling, the fuel filler door may take a few moments to open
As part of emission system operation, it may take up to 10 seconds for the fuel filler
door to automatically release after the opener switch is pressed. Before refueling is
possible, a message will be shown on the multi-information display. (P. 128)
■ Running out of fuel
When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel
the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light
(P. 508) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not
be able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to add to make the low fuel level
warning light go out is about 3.4 gal. [13 L, 2.8 Imp. gal.], when the vehicle is on a
level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope.)
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and
driving conditions.
45
1
Before driving
If a warning message is shown on
the multi-information display, read
the message and follow the
instructions.
1-1. Hybrid system
CAUTION
■ High voltage precautions
The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC
and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric
shock that may result in death or serious injury.
● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables and
their connectors.
● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage.
Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey
the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
● Never try to open the service plug access
5-seat models
hole located behind the rear seat. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is
serviced and is subject to high voltage.
4-seat models
46
1-1. Hybrid system
CAUTION
■ Road accident cautions
47
1
Before driving
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury:
● Pull your vehicle off the road, put the shift lever in “P”, apply the parking brake,
and turn the hybrid system off.
● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.
● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may
occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch it as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from
the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or
eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or if possible, boric
acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never
use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small
amount of water may be dangerous.
● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with four wheels raised. If the wheels with
the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor
may continue to generate electricity. This may cause an electricity leakage leading to a fire. (P. 497)
■ Nickel-metal hydride battery
Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury.
■ Emergency shut off system
● Carefully check to see if there are exposed high voltage parts or cables. Never
touch the parts or cables. (P. 40)
● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked
onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as
soon as possible.
1-1. Hybrid system
NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery air vents
● Do not put foreign objects over the air vents. The hybrid battery (traction battery)
may overheat and be damaged.
● Clean the air vents regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from
overheating.
● Do not wet the air vents. It may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).
● Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If
water spills over the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged.
48
1-2. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 54)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 67)
1
Before driving
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
■ Card key
Electronic key
Operating the smart access system with push-button start
(P. 54)
Mechanical key
49
1-2. Key information
Using the mechanical key
Take out the mechanical key.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock
cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt
to insert it.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P. 531)
■ Card key
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a
problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly.
● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button
using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
● To store the mechanical key in the card
key, insert it inside while pressing the
lock release button.
50
1-2. Key information
● If the battery cover is not installed and
the battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem.
1
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances
demand. (P. 76, 371)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■ Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key
number plate.
■ To have a new key made
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the keys provided with your vehicle; the electronic keys, card key and key number plate.
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves
that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
51
Before driving
● The card key is not waterproof.
1-2. Key information
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
● Do not disassemble the electronic keys.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■ When a vehicle key is lost
If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your
Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that
was provided with your vehicle.
■ Precautions for handling the card keys
● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card key.
Doing so may damage the card key.
● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card
key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key,
immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To
remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have
your Lexus dealer replace the battery.
● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
52
1-2. Key information
NOTICE
● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the
53
1
Before driving
following situations:
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as a tip of mechanical pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene.
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your
pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Electronic key
Electronic key
Electronic key
Unlocks and locks the doors (P. 55)
Opens the trunk (P. 55)
Starts and stops the hybrid system (P. 184)
54
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking and locking the doors
Grip the driver's door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passenger's door handle to unlock all the
doors. *
The door cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 60)
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
Pressing and holding the button
closes the windows and moon roof.
Opening the trunk
Press the button.
The trunk lid automatically opens
fully.
55
Before driving
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
1
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Antenna location and effective range
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna inside trunk
Antenna outside trunk
56
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
When opening the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
the trunk release button.
When starting the hybrid
system
or
changing
“POWER” switch modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
57
1
Before driving
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
an outside door handle. (Only
the doors detecting the key
can be operated.)
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon
roof are operating.
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle
once more.
■ Adjusting the volume of the buzzer
The operation signal buzzer and door lock buzzer can be set to the desired volume.
Increases the volume
Decreases the volume
The buzzer can be turned off by turning the
knob fully clockwise.
58
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Conditions affecting operation
59
1
Before driving
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating properly:
(Ways of coping: P. 531)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication devices
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit
radio waves
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote
control.
STEP 1 Turn the “POWER” switch OFF.
STEP 2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and
hold
holding
,
, or
on the key.
for about 5 seconds while pressing and
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat step 2.)
Multi-information
Unlocking doors
Beep
display
Hold the driver’s door handle
to unlock only the driver’s
Exterior: Beeps 3 times
door.
Interior: Rings once
Hold a passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors.
Hold the door handle to
unlock the front and rear
doors on your side.
Exterior: Beeps 4 times
Interior: Rings once
Hold the door handle to
unlock the door.
Exterior: Beeps once
Interior: Rings once
Hold a door handle to unlock Exterior: Beeps twice
all doors.
Interior: Rings once
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been
changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the
doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 135)
60
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Battery-saving function
61
1
Before driving
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the
12-volt battery from discharging and the electronic key battery from depleting.
● When the entry function has not been used for 30 days or more
● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when
● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch when carrying the electronic key on your person.
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function.
(P. 67)
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 531)
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year
and a half.)
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system stops. (P. 63)
● The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because
the key always receives radio waves. If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection area
becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( P. 474)
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
• TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Glass top ranges
• Table lamps
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the
rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray, floor or door
pockets, or in the glove box when the hybrid system is started or “POWER”
switch modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will
become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside
the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the
hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective
range. (The door will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if
the doors are not opened and closed.)
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key
is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original
position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
62
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
Alarm
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 2
seconds.
Situation
Correction procedure
An attempt was made to lock
the doors using the entry
function while the electronic
key was still inside the passenger compartment.
Retrieve the electronic
key from the passenger
compartment and lock
the doors again.
The trunk was closed with the Retrieve the electronic
electronic key inside and all key from the trunk and
doors were locked.
close the trunk lid.
An attempt was made to exit
the vehicle and lock the
Exterior alarm
Turn the “POWER”
doors while carrying the
sounds once for 60
switch OFF and lock the
electronic key without first
seconds.
doors again.
turning the “POWER” switch
OFF.
Exterior alarm
An attempt was made to lock Close all of the doors
sounds once for 10 the vehicle while a door was and lock the doors
seconds.
open.
again.
63
1
Before driving
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the
multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable
accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Perform the appropriate correction
procedure described in the following table:
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Alarm
Situation
The “POWER” switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s door
was open (or the driver’s
Interior alarm pings door was opened while the
“POWER” switch was in
continuously.
ACCESSORY mode).
Correction procedure
Turn the “POWER”
switch OFF and close
the driver’s door.
The “POWER” switch was
turned OFF while the driver’s Close the driver’s door.
door was open.
Interior alarm
sounds continuously. *1
When the “POWER” switch
is in ON or ACCESSORY
Shift the shift lever to “P”
mode, an attempt was made
and turn the “POWER”
to open the door and exit the
switch OFF.
vehicle, and the shift lever
was not in “P”.
Interior and exterior alarms sound
continuously. *1
When the “POWER” switch
is in ON or ACCESSORY
mode, the driver's door was
closed after the key was carried outside the vehicle, and
the shift lever was not in “P”.
Shift the shift lever to
“P”, turn the “POWER”
switch OFF and close
the driver's door again.
The electronic key has a low
battery.
Replace the electronic
key battery.
Interior alarm pings An attempt was made to start
the hybrid system without the Start the hybrid system
once. *1
electronic key being present, with the electronic key
or the electronic key was not present. *2
functioning normally.
64
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Alarm
Situation
Correction procedure
*1: A warning message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instru-
ment cluster.
*2: If the hybrid system does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle,
the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving
the signal from the key. (P. 61)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 531)
● Starting the hybrid system:P. 533
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 474
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be deactivated.
(Customizable features P. 573)
65
1
Before driving
The driver's door was closed
after the key was carried out- Turn the “POWER”
switch OFF and close
side the vehicle, and the
the driver's door again.
Interior alarm pings “POWER” switch was not
turned
OFF.
once and exterior
alarm sounds 3
An occupant carried the
times. *1
electronic key outside the
Bring the electronic key
vehicle and closed the door
back into the vehicle.
while the “POWER” switch
was not OFF.
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
from the smart access system antennas. (P. 57) The radio waves may affect the
operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask
your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of
emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable
the entry function.
● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves
could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
66
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and
the trunk from outside the vehicle.
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
1
Before driving
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows and
moon roof (press and hold)*
Opens the trunk (press and
hold)
Sounds alarm
(press and hold) (P. 135)
*: This setting must be customized
at your Lexus dealer.
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon
roof are opening.
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle
once more.
67
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Adjusting the volume of the buzzer
The operation signal buzzer and door lock buzzer can be set to the desired volume.
(P. 58)
■ Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(P. 135)
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 61
■ Security feature
P. 63
■ If the wireless remote control does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 531)
● Starting the hybrid system: P. 533
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 474
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 59
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 573)
68
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico
FCC ID: NI4TMRF-002
FCC ID: HYQ14ACX
1
FCC ID: HYQ14AEB
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in the mainland U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMRF-002
FCC ID: HYQ14ACX
FCC ID: HYQ14AEB
FCC ID: NI4TMRF-001
FCC ID: HYQ14ADF
FCC ID: HYQ14AEF
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
69
Before driving
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switch.
■ Entry function
P. 55
■ Wireless remote control
P. 67
■ Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
■ Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle even
if the lock buttons are in the lock
position.
70
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
The door cannot be locked if the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the locks
are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
Function
Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of “P” with the hybrid
system on locks all doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Shifting the shift lever to “P” unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door locking
function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is
opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“POWER” switch OFF.
71
Before driving
Rear door child-protector lock
1
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Close all the doors and turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode.
(Perform step 2 within 20 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to “P” or “N”,
and press and hold the driver's
door lock switch (
or
)
for approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch positions
corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel
the function.
Function
Shift position linked door locking
function
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Shift lever position
Driver’s door
switch position
P
Speed linked door locking function
Driver's door linked door unlocking
function
N
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked
and then unlocked.
72
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Impact detection door lock release system
73
1
Before driving
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■ Door closer
In the event that a door is left slightly open, the door closer will automatically close it
to the fully closed position.
● The door closer will operate regardless of “POWER” switch mode.
● The door closer will not function if the door has been closed while pulling the
inside or outside door handle.
● The door can be opened by pulling the inside or outside door handle, even
when the door closer is operating (except when the lock button is in the lock
position or the child-protector lock is set).
● The motor sound may be heard for several seconds after the door closer closes
the door. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 531)
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 573)
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting
in death or serious injury.
● Always use a seat belt.
● Always lock all doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it
may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
■ Door closer
In the event that a door is left slightly open, the door closer will automatically close it
to the fully closed position. If the child-protector lock is set, the door closer will not
stop during operation even if an attempt is made to open the door from inside the
vehicle. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the door. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent door closer malfunction
Do not frequently repeat opening and closing of doors, or apply excessive force to
a door while the door closer is operating.
74
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless
remote control.
■ Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press the opener switch.
1
Before driving
The trunk lid automatically
opens fully.
■ Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Entry function
P. 55
Wireless remote control
P. 67
Trunk closer switch
Pressing the switch closes the
trunk lid automatically. (A buzzer
sounds.)
Pressing the switch while the trunk
lid is closing opens the trunk lid
again.
75
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Canceling the trunk opener feature
Turn the main switch in the glove
box off to disable the trunk opener.
On
Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the wireless remote control or the entry function.
■ Trunk handle
Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.
■ Trunk easy closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside (when
all the doors are locked)
Closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened by pressing the button on the trunk lid.
■ Overload protection function
The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk
lid.
■ Fall-down protection function
While the trunk lid is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop
the opening operation to prevent the trunk lid from rapidly falling down.
76
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Jam protection function
While the trunk lid is closing automatically, the trunk lid will stop closing and open if
something gets caught.
■ Internal trunk release lever
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
■ Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 531)
■ Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after disabling the
trunk opener main switch
P. 51
■ Customization
Setting of power trunk opener and closer function can be deactivated.
(Customizable features P. 573)
77
1
Before driving
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down
on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of the trunk lid.
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage in
the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious
health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk
lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they
are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
78
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Using the trunk
● The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open or close
the trunk lid on an incline than on a level
surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself.
Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open
and secure before using the trunk.
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
trunk handle is used to fully close the
trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms
being caught.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid.
Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after
it is opened.
79
1
Before driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening
it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Trunk easy closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly
open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It
takes several seconds before the trunk
easy closer begins to operate. Be careful
not to catch fingers or anything else in the
trunk lid, as this may cause bone fractures
or other serious injuries.
■ Power trunk opener and closer
Observe the following precautions when operating the power trunk opener and
closer.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or
anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
● If the trunk closer switch is pressed while the trunk lid is opening during automatic
operation, the trunk lid stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the
trunk lid may open or close suddenly.
● On an incline, the trunk lid may fall after it opens automatically. Make sure the
trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.
● In the following situations, the power trunk opener and closer may detect an
abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the trunk lid
has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped trunk
lid may suddenly fall, causing an accident.
• When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the “POWER”
switch is turned to ON mode or the hybrid system is started during automatic
operation
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. The
power trunk opener and closer may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or
the trunk lid may fall closed again after it is opened.
80
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Jam protection function
NOTICE
■ To prevent trunk easy closer malfunction
Do not apply force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating.
■ To prevent damage to the power trunk opener and closer
● Make sure that there is no luggage or snow on the trunk lid before operating the
power trunk opener and closer. In addition, make sure that there is no ice
between the trunk lid and frame that prevents movement of the trunk lid. Operating the power trunk opener and closer when excessive load is present on the
trunk lid may cause a malfunction.
● Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the power trunk opener and
closer is operating.
81
1
Before driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the trunk lid fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the
trunk lid.
● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object
that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Passenger’s seat
Driver’s seat
Seat position switch
The height of the driver's head restraint is automatically adjusted simultaneously with the seat position adjustment operation.
Seatback angle switch
Head restraint height adjustment switch (P. 106)
Seat cushion (front) angle switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support switch
Driver’s seat: 4-way
Front passenger’s seat: 2-way
Seat cushion length adjustment switch
82
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Operating the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat
Without rear console display
Tilts the seatback forward
Tilts the seatback backward
Moves the seat forward
Moves the seat backward
1
Before driving
With rear console display
Tilts the seatback forward
Tilts the seatback backward
Moves the seat forward
Moves the seat backward
83
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Operating the front passenger's seat from the rear seat (with relaxation seat)
5-seat models
Moves the front passenger's
seat forward
The signal beeps when the seat
operation stops at the forward limit.
Moves the front passenger's
seat backward
The seatback will return to the neutral position. If the head restraint is
folded, it will rise before the seatback moves.
4-seat models
Moves the front passenger's
seat forward
The signal beeps when the seat
operation stops at the forward limit.
Moves the front passenger's
seat backward
The seatback will return to the neutral position. If the head restraint is
folded, it will rise before the seatback moves.
84
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Active head restraints
When reversing, even a small
amount of force applied from the
rear, such as a minor rear impact,
may cause the head restraints to
move.
■ Operating the front passenger's seat from the rear seat (with relaxation seat)
The front passenger's seat can be operated when the “POWER” switch is in ON
mode. However, in the following situations, the front passenger's seat does not
move even when the switch is operated:
● The weight of an occupant or heavy object etc. is detected on the front passenger's seat.
● The front passenger's seat belt is fastened.
● The front passenger's door is open. (The front seat will not move forward.)
■ Seat cushion automatic length adjustment (driver's seat)
If the front of the cushion gets too close to the area around the instrument panel
when the seat position is being adjusted, the seat cushion will automatically retract.
■ Seat operation automatic stop function (with relaxation seat)
If a front seat is likely to come into contact with the retractable table (4-seat models)
or the ottoman during seat operation or activation of the auto away function, a
buzzer will sound and seat slide operation will be stopped partway.
(A warning message will be shown on the multi-information display.)
85
1
Before driving
If the vehicle detects an impact
during a rear-end collision, the
front part of the head restraint
moves forward and upward to help
reduce the risk of whiplash to the
seat occupant.
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Active head restraints
● The active head restraint on the front passenger seat will not activate if the seat
is unoccupied. However, it may activate during a rear-end collision if luggage is
in the seat or the seat belt is fastened.
● Once the active head restraint has activated, the head restraint remains protruded forward and upward. After it has operated, have it repaired at your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move
and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
■ Operating the front passenger's seat from the driver's seat or rear seat
Do not operate the front passenger's seat when a passenger is seated in it. In addition, do not let anyone sit down in the front passenger's seat while the seat is being
operated or when the head restraint is being folded. The front passenger may catch
their legs between the instrument panel and seat, or the head restraint may interfere with their head, resulting in injury.
■ The active head restraint on the front passenger seat
Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which may prevents the sensor from
detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the active head restraint may
not activate in the event of an accident.
■ Active head restraint precautions
● Do not put head restraint covers.
● For removal, installation, modification, disassembly or disposal of the active head
restraints, contact your Lexus dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the active head restraints may prevent them from operating properly during an accident.
86
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
NOTICE
■ Operating the front passenger's seat from the driver's seat or rear seat
87
1
Before driving
Before operating the front passenger's seat, make sure that there is no luggage or
any other objects on the seat or in the footwell that could prevent its operation.
Failure to do so may result in excess force being applied, causing damage to the
seat and/or the luggage.
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Power rear seat
5-seat models without relaxation seat
Seat selection switch
The indicator light for the seat that can be operated comes on.
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback upper angle adjustment switch
Head restraint height adjustment switch (P. 106)
Pelvic support seat controller
The seat return function linked to the door opening operation allows
the seat to automatically return to the neutral position for easier access
to and from the vehicle.
: If equipped
88
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
5-seat models with relaxation seat
1
Before driving
The right-hand rear seat is a relaxation seat, which is equipped with a
seatback angle adjustment function and an ottoman.
Seat selection switch
The indicator light for the seat that can be operated comes on.
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback upper angle adjustment switch
Head restraint height adjustment switch (P. 106)
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Ottoman angle adjustment switch
Front passenger’s seat control switch (P. 84)
Relaxation mode switch
Rear seat relaxation system/pelvic support seat controller
The seat return function linked to the door opening operation allows
the seat to automatically return to the neutral position for easier access
to and from the vehicle.
89
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
4-seat models
The right-hand rear seat is a relaxation seat, which is equipped with a
seatback angle adjustment function and an ottoman.
Seat selection switch
The indicator light for the seat that can be operated comes on.
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback upper angle adjustment switch
Head restraint height adjustment switch (P. 106)
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Ottoman angle adjustment switch
Front passenger’s seat control switch (P. 84)
Relaxation mode switch
Rear seat relaxation system/pelvic support seat controller
The seat return function linked to the door opening operation allows
the seat to automatically return to the neutral position for easier access
to and from the vehicle.
90
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Returning the rear seat from the front seats
The seat will return to the neutral
position while the button is pressed
and held.
1
Before driving
Relaxation mode operation (relaxation seat)
Relaxation mode can be entered by operating a switch. The front passenger seat will move forward, and then the seatback of the relaxation seat
will recline and the ottoman will simultaneously rise.
5-seat models
Pressing the switch will cause a
beep to sound and operation will
start.
Enters relaxation mode
Returns to the neutral position.
To stop the operation part-way
through, press either side of the
switch again, or press any other
seat adjustment button.
91
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
4-seat models
Pressing the switch will cause a
beep to sound and operation will
start.
Enters relaxation mode
Returns to the neutral position.
To stop the operation part-way
through, press either side of the
switch again, or press any other
seat adjustment button.
92
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Pelvic support seat with seat vibrator
Pelvic support seat with seat vibrator, which feature a support plate
mounted in the seatback and a vibration function, are equipped on each
outside rear seat. The support plate position and vibration speed can be
adjusted according to the occupant’s preferences.
Support plate position adjustment switch
Vibration switch
Press
to operate the vibration function. Vibration will start in
the same speed level as when previously operated. Each time
is pressed, the speed changes
between 3 levels. Pressing “OFF”
stops the vibration function.
With relaxation seat
Support plate position adjustment switch
Vibration switch
Press
to operate the vibration function. Vibration will start in
the same speed level as when previously operated. Each time
is pressed, the speed changes
between 3 levels. Pressing “OFF”
stops the vibration function.
93
Before driving
Without relaxation seat
1
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seat relaxation system (with relaxation seat)
Pneumatic chambers built into the right-hand rear seat provide the occupant with pressure of different speeds and intensities.
Turns the system on and off
If no buttons are selected within
approximately 3 minutes of operating this switch, the system will
automatically turn off.
Starts the “SHIATSU” program
Partial pressure for the whole back
Starts the “STRETCH” program
Stretches and relaxes the lower
back
Starts operation for the upper
back
Starts operation for the lower
back
Adjusts the intensity of the air
pressure
3 intensity levels are available.
Adjusts the speed of the air unit
3 speed levels are available.
94
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Seat return function linked to the door opening operation
● Operating conditions
Pressing the “C” button will disable the seat
return function.
The indicator light comes on when the seat
return function is disabled.
Pressing the button again will enable the seat
return function.
● Seat return operation after turning the “POWER” switch OFF
The seat will automatically return to the neutral position if the door is opened
within approximately 45 seconds of the “POWER” switch being turned OFF.
■ Relaxation mode (relaxation seat)
● Operating conditions
Relaxation mode can be entered when the “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
However, in the following situations, relaxation mode cannot be entered even
when the switch is operated:
• The weight of an occupant or heavy object etc. is detected on the front passenger's seat.
• The front passenger's seat belt is fastened.
• The front passenger's door is open. (The front seat will not move forward.)
● Operation after turning the “POWER” switch OFF
The rear seat can be returned to the neutral position as long as the relaxation
mode switch is operated within approximately 45 seconds of the “POWER”
switch being turned OFF.
95
1
Before driving
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
● Canceling operation partway through
During the seat return operation, performing either of the following actions
cancels the operation:
• Pressing the “SET”, “M” or “C” button
• Pressing any of the seat adjustment switches
● Disabling the seat return function
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Pelvic support seat with seat vibrator
● Operating conditions
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
● Automatic stop function
• Vibration will automatically stop approximately 15 minutes after starting.
• Vibration will automatically stop if the adjacent rear door is opened.
● Pelvic support seat return function
• The position of the support plate will automatically return to the neutral position within approximately 5 seconds of the “POWER” switch being turned
OFF.
• The position of the support plate will automatically return to the neutral position if the adjacent rear door is opened.
■ Rear seat relaxation system (with relaxation seat)
● Operating conditions
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
● Automatic stop function
Each operation will automatically stop approximately 15 minutes after starting.
CAUTION
■ Power rear seats
● Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may come into contact with the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● When returning the rear seats from the front seats
To avoid injuring the rear passengers, wait until they have gotten out of the vehicle
before returning the rear seats to the neutral position.
96
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
● When adjusting the seat position and ottoman angle (with relaxation seat)
NOTICE
■ To prevent an ottoman malfunction (with relaxation seat)
● Do not place any objects in the rear seat footwell that could prevent the opera-
tion of the ottoman.
● Do not place heavy luggage on the ottoman.
● Do not place any objects under the ottoman while it is raised for use. These
objects may interfere with the ottoman being folded, causing damage to the ottoman or the objects themselves.
97
1
Before driving
Keep sufficient footwell space to prevent your feet from being caught by the front
seat.
● Using the ottoman (with relaxation seat)
• Do not sit on the ottoman.
If someone sits on the ottoman, the seat belt cannot be fitted properly, and
they may be thrown from the seat in the event of an accident or sudden braking, resulting in death or serious injury.
• When getting in or out of the vehicle, retract the ottoman. If the ottoman is not
retracted, it may cause a fall, resulting in an injury.
■ Using the pelvic support seat with seat vibrator and rear seat relaxation system
● Those who are pregnant, have recently given birth, or suffer from ailments requiring rest (heart disease etc.) should consult a doctor before use.
● Do not allow children to use the pelvic support seat vibration function or the rear
seat relaxation function.
● Do not use immediately after consuming a meal or alcohol, or for an extended
period of time.
● If you feel sick while using the pelvic support seat vibration function or the rear
seat relaxation function, immediately discontinue use.
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Driving position memory
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat and steering wheel, angle of the outside rear view mirrors, and height of seat belt
shoulder anchor) can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the
doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
The same buttons are found on the front passenger's side, allowing the
front passenger's seat position and seat belt shoulder anchor height to be
memorized.
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Check that the shift lever is in “P”.
STEP 2 Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode.
STEP 3 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, outside rear view mirrors and seat belt shoulder anchor height to the desired positions. (When memorizing the front passenger’s seat, adjust the
front passenger’s seat to the desired positions.)
Press the “SET” button, then
STEP 4
within 3 seconds press button
“1”, “2” or “3” until the signal
beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
98
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Recalling the memorized position
STEP 1 Check that the shift lever is in “P”.
STEP 2 Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode.
Press button “1”, “2” or “3” to
STEP 3
recall the memorized position.
1
Before driving
Front passenger’s seat (with
relaxation seat): When retractable table (4-seat models) or
ottoman is used, rearward
memories cannot be recalled.
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation (driver’s seat)
One memorized driving position can be registered to each electronic
key. This driving position will then be recalled when the driver’s door is
unlocked using the electronic key’s entry function or wireless remote
control and the driver’s door is opened.
Using the wireless remote control
STEP 1 Turn the “POWER” switch OFF and close the driver's door.
99
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
STEP 2
While pressing the desired button
(“1”, “2” or “3”), press
on the
wireless remote control until the
signal beeps.
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, open and close a door
once after a driving position has been recorded. (If a door is not opened
within 30 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and
the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 135)
Using the door lock switch
Carry only one of the keys (including the card key) to which you want to
link the driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving
position cannot be linked properly.
STEP 1
STEP 2
100
Turn the “POWER” switch OFF and close the driver's door.
While pressing the desired button
(“1”, “2” or “3”), press the lock or
unlock side on the door lock
switch (either the driver or passenger side) until the signal beeps.
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Power easy access system (driver’s seat)
The auto away/return function
enables easy access by activating
when the driver attempts to enter
or exit the vehicle.
1
Before driving
Auto away function (exiting the vehicle)
When all of the following actions have been performed, the steering
wheel will move up and back to the point farthest away from the driver
and the seat will move backward:
● The shift lever has been shifted to “P”.
● The “POWER” switch has been turned OFF.
● The driver seat belt has been unfastened.
Auto return function (entering the vehicle)
When either of the following actions has been performed, the steering
wheel will move toward the driver and seat will move forward:
● The “POWER” switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode.
● The driver seat belt has been fastened.
101
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ When driving position memory is linked with door unlock operation
If the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat will move toward the memorized
position but stop slightly beforehand to allow easy access to the vehicle.
Turning the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode or fastening the driver’s seat
belt moves the seat fully into the memorized position.
■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation
STEP 1 Turn the “POWER” switch OFF and close the driver's door.
STEP 2 Using the wireless remote control: While pressing the “SET” button, press
on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps.
Using the door lock switch: While pressing the “SET” button, press the
lock or unlock side on the door lock switch until the signal beeps.
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “POWER” switch OFF
Driver’s seat: Memorized positions (except the steering wheel position) can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver's door is opened and 60 seconds after it is
closed again, even after the “POWER” switch is turned OFF.
Front passenger’s seat: Memorized position can be activated up to 180 seconds
after the front passenger’s door is opened, even after the “POWER” switch is
turned OFF.
■ Stopping memorized position recall operations part-way through
To stop all memorized position recall operations part-way through, perform one of
the following actions:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
To individually stop a memorized position recall operation for a seat, the steering
wheel, outside rear view mirrors, or a seat belt shoulder anchor, operate the corresponding position adjustment switch while the memorized position is being
recalled. All items can still be adjusted manually even if their recall operation is
stopped part-way through.
102
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Seat operation automatic stop function (with relaxation seat)
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger
or squeeze your body against the steering wheel. Always check that there is no rear
passenger or luggage behind your seat during the auto away function is activated
when you stop and exit from the vehicle.
103
1
Before driving
If a front seat is likely to come into contact with the retractable table (4-seat models)
or the ottoman during seat operation or activation of the auto away function, a
buzzer will sound and seat slide operation will be stopped partway.
(A warning message will be shown on the multi-information display.)
■ Power easy access system operations
● If the seat is already close to the rearmost position, the auto away function may
not operate when the driver exits the vehicle.
● If the seat position is adjusted during the auto away function’s operation, the
operation will stop.
● If the seat position is adjusted during or after the auto away function’s operation,
the auto return function will not operate when entering the vehicle.
■ Customization
The distance that the driver’s seat moves backward during the auto away function
can be changed. (Customizable features P. 573)
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seat position memory
The rear seat position can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a
button.
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the rear seat to the desired position.
Press the “SET” button until the
STEP 3
signal beeps.
If the preset is being used, the
previously recorded seat position will be overwritten.
■ Recalling the memorized position
Press the “M” button until the
signal beeps.
Relaxation seat: The memorized position will only be
recalled if the ottoman is in a
position higher than the memorized position. It will not move in
an upward direction.
: If equipped
104
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Seat return function linked to the door opening operation
When the door is opened, the rear seat will automatically return to the neutral position. This function is available for 45 seconds after the “POWER” switch is turned
OFF.
■ Canceling the seat position recall or return function
Performing either of the following cancels the seat returning operation:
● Press the “SET”, “M” or “C” button.
● Press any of the seat adjustment switches.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the rear passengers do not strike the front
seats.
105
Before driving
Pressing the “C” button will disable the seat
position recall or seat return function.
The indicator light comes on when the function is disabled.
Pressing the button again will enable the seat
position recall or seat return function.
1
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
■ Front seats
Vertical adjustment
P. 82
Horizontal adjustment
■ Outside rear seats
Power type
Vertical adjustment
P. 88
Side support adjustment
Manual type
Vertical adjustment
Pull the head restraints up when
raising.
Push and hold the lock release
button when lowering.
Horizontal adjustment
Lock release button
106
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Rear center seat (5-seat models)
To use
To fold
1
Before driving
■ Removing the head restraints
For removal and installation of the head restraint, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints (except rear center seat)
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■ Rear center seat
Make sure to pull the head restraint forward when using the rear center seat.
107
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● Manual type: After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make
sure they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
108
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■ Correct use of the seat belts
1
Before driving
● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the plate into the buckle
until a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Release button
Press the release button.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled
out of the retractor, firmly pull
the belt and release it.
109
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
Up
Down
Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats)
If the shoulder belt sits close to a
person’s neck, slide the seat belt
comfort guide forward.
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal collision.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
110
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt using a motor, thus enhancing the
effectiveness of the seat belt pretensioner in a crash.
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 163)
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 109)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the round part of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only
the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could
suffer death or serious injury as a result of
sudden braking or a collision.
111
Before driving
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses control of the vehicle. (P. 315)
1
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 158)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 109 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Automatic adjustment of the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
A desired seat belt shoulder anchor height can be entered to memory and recalled
automatically by the driving position memory and seat position memory.
(P. 98)
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
112
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
113
1
Before driving
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
(P. 110)
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,
the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Precaution for pre-collision seat belts
Do not rely on the pre-collision system to avoid accidents. Always pay attention to
the surrounding conditions, and drive safely and responsibly.
114
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
115
1
Before driving
extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the
“POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or when the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 98)
■ Power easy access system
The steering wheel and driver's seat move in accordance with “POWER” switch
mode and the driver's seat belt condition. (P. 101)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
116
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles
behind and automatically reduce the reflected light.
Turns automatic mode on/off
1
Before driving
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
The mirror will revert to automatic mode each time the
“POWER” switch is turned to
ON mode.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
117
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
118
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “POWER” switch
is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
Selects a mirror to adjust
(“L”: left or “R”: right)
Adjusts the mirror up, down,
in, or out using the switch
1
Before driving
Folding and extending the mirrors
Folds the mirrors
Extends the mirrors
Putting the outside rear view mirror folding switch in the neutral
position sets the mirrors to automatic mode. Automatic mode
allows the folding or extending of
the mirrors to be linked to locking/
unlocking of the doors.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 363)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 98)
119
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Linked mirror function when reversing
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will
not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between “L” and
“R”).
■ Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 117)
CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand
caught by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
120
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
1
Before driving
*: Pushing the switch in the oppo-
site direction will stop window
travel partway.
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock the
passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
121
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The power windows can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be closed using the entry function. (P. 55)
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
(P. 531)
■ Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“POWER” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door.
● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the “POWER” switch is
turned to ON mode.
● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
STEP 1 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has
closed.
STEP 2 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
opened completely.
STEP 3 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once
again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
122
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door key operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 573)
1
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
123
Before driving
■ Closing the windows
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and
down.
■ Opening and closing
Open
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position to
reduce wind noise. Press the
switch again to fully open.
Close
Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon roof
partway.
■ Tilting up and down
Tilt up
Tilt down
Lightly press either of the moon
roof switches to stop the moon roof
partway.
124
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The moon roof can be operated when
125
1
Before driving
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the “POWER” switch is turned OFF and the driver's door
is opened with the moon roof open.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be closed using the entry function. (P. 55)
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 531)
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“POWER” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or OFF. It cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting
down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
STEP 2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
STEP 2 Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up
position and stops.
STEP 3 Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch
again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.
Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then
release the switch.
1:
* If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP”
switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second.
Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is
completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure
correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door key operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 573)
126
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■ Opening the moon roof
127
1
Before driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
The fuel tank of your vehicle has a special structure, which requires a
reduction in fuel tank pressure before refueling. After the opener switch
has been pressed, it will take several seconds until the vehicle is ready for
refueling.
■ Before refueling the vehicle
Close all the doors and windows, and turn the “POWER” switch
OFF.
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
STEP 1
Press the opener switch.
The fuel filler door will open
within about 10 seconds of the
switch being pressed. Before
refueling is possible, a message
will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument
cluster to indicate the progress
of the fuel filler door opener.
STEP 2
128
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
1-6. Refueling
STEP 3
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
1
Before driving
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank cap,
turn it until a clicking sound is
heard.
129
1-6. Refueling
■ Fuel types
Premium unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 91 [Research Octane Number 96] or
higher)
■ Fuel tank capacity
Approximately 22.2 gal. (84 L, 18.4 Imp. gal.)
■ When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable
● If the fuel filler door opener switch can-
not be operated, contact your Lexus
dealer to service the vehicle. In case
where refueling is urgently necessary,
the fuel filler door can be opened using
the lever in the trunk.
● Using the lever to open the fuel filler door may not allow for an adequate reduc-
tion in fuel tank pressure before refueling. To prevent fuel from spilling out, turn
the cap slowly when removing it.
During refueling, fuel may spill out from the filler opening due to air being discharged from inside the fuel tank. Therefore, fill the fuel tank carefully and
slowly.
130
1-6. Refueling
CAUTION
■ Refueling the vehicle
131
1
Before driving
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted
metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static
electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can
cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to
come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious
injury.
1-6. Refueling
NOTICE
■ Refueling
● Finish refueling within 30 minutes. If more than 30 minutes passes, the internal
valve closes. In this condition, fuel may overflow during the refueling process.
Press the fuel filler door opener switch again.
● Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's
painted surface.
132
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid
system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
1
Before driving
The indicator light flashes after
the “POWER” switch has been
turned OFF to indicate that the
system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the “POWER” switch has
been turned to ACCESSORY
or ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
■ Conditions affecting operation
Depending on surrounding environment and conditions, the immobilizer system
may not operate properly. This may prevent the hybrid system from starting.
(P. 59)
133
1-7. Theft deterrent system
■ Certifications for the immobilizer system
U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
134
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible entry is
detected.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
1
Before driving
● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other
than using the entry function, wireless remote control or key. (The
doors will lock again automatically.)
● The hood is opened.
■ Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and hood,
and lock all doors.
The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.
■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:
● Unlock the doors or trunk.
● Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode or start the hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
135
1-7. Theft deterrent system
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the
following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door,
the trunk or hood.
● The 12-volt battery is recharged or
replaced when the vehicle is locked.
■ Alarm-operated door lock
● When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent
intruders.
● Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and make
sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt
battery.
136
1-7. Theft deterrent system
■ Panic mode
When
is pressed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound for about 60
seconds and the vehicle lights flash to deter
any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
137
Before driving
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
wireless remote control.
1
1-8. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 82)
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 82)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable. (P. 82)
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the SRS
driver airbag is facing your
chest. (P. 116)
Adjust the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 106)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 109)
138
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
139
1
Before driving
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment
mechanism may also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
1-8. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
SRS Knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
140
1-8. Safety information
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
Front SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
Rear SRS side airbags (power rear seat)
Can help protect the torso of the outside rear seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants
1
Before driving
SRS seat cushion airbag (relaxation seat)
Can help restrain the relaxation seat occupant
141
1-8. Safety information
SRS airbag system components
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU and
sensors)
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
Front side airbags
Active head restraints
Side and curtain shield airbag
sensors
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light
Curtain shield airbag sensors
SRS warning light
Rear side airbags
Seat cushion airbag
Driver airbag
Driver's seat belt buckle
switch
Driver's seat position sensor
Airbag sensor assembly
Front airbag sensors
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system
controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The
driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The
front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant
classification sensor etc.
142
1-8. Safety information
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors,
side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor
assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
(P. 505)
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the seats, and parts of the front pillar and roof side rail, may be hot for
several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a
severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to
the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to
push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants
to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants
are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 414)
143
1
Before driving
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system
triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
1-8. Safety information
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion air-
bag)
● The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to
an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall
that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck etc.).
● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags, SRS seat
cushion airbag and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting
in the front passenger seat. However, the front SRS passenger airbag may
deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is
unoccupied.(P. 109)
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision (SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag)
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag may also deploy if a serious
impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the
illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling
144
1-8. Safety information
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield air-
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
145
1
Before driving
bags)
● The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of
an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding
to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle
colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
● The front SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front SRS side airbag
on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is
unoccupied. (P. 109)
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags and
SRS seat cushion airbag)
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag are generally not designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type
causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front
airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag may occur.
1-8. Safety information
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
146
1-8. Safety information
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
● A portion of the doors is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag
or lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● Relaxation seat: The seat cushion surface is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
147
1
Before driving
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags has been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
1-8. Safety information
● The surface of the seats with the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
148
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(P. 158)
149
1
Before driving
nected to the driver's seat belt buckle but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the driver's
seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system
will judge that the driver is wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the SRS driver's
airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in
the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or
passenger have items resting on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seats toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
150
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything
● Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist
grip.
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS
curtain shield airbag deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to
remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
and SRS seat cushion airbag inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS
airbags.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components shown on P. 142.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door
or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off
any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
151
1
Before driving
against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front passenger airbag may
not deploy in the event of a collision.
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or
serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar,
etc.)
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
152
1-8. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and
activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.
1
Before driving
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
153
1-8. Safety information
Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
SRS warning light
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Devices
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Active head restraint
“AIR BAG
ON”
Off
Flashing*2
Activated
■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
SRS warning light
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Devices
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Active head restraint
154
“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
Off
Flashing*2
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
1-8. Safety information
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
■ There is a malfunction in the system
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
warning light
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Devices
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Active head restraint
“AIR BAG
OFF”
On
Off
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
155
1
Before driving
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
Not illuminated
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Deactivated
Active head restraint
1-8. Safety information
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 158)
*5: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on
how to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 163)
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and
reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may
not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a
collision.
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on
the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
156
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
157
1
Before driving
may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 163)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
1-8. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 163)
158
1-8. Safety information
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat
1
Before driving
Forward facing  Convertible seat
Booster seat
159
1-8. Safety information
■ When installing a child restraint system on a rear outboard seat (power rear seat
only)
When using a child restraint system in a rear
outboard seat, adjust the following:
● The upper seatback to the rearmost posi-
tion
● Relaxation seat: The seatback to the most
upright position
● The seat cushion to the fully rearward
position
● The head restraint to the lowest and rear-
most position
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and
use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 109)
160
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
161
1
Before driving
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be allowed to be installed on the
front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since
there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even
if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger
airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may
be killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the SRS side
airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
162
1-8. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the outside rear seats using the LATCH anchors
or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
1
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Before driving
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the rear outside seats. (Buttons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s
seat belt) (P. 109)
Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for each rear seat.
163
1-8. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system
With power rear seat: Adjust the seatback as upright as possible.
Type A
STEP 1
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
STEP 3 Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors.
STEP 4 If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 2
Canada only
164
1-8. Safety information
Type B
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
STEP 3 Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
STEP 4 If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 2
165
Before driving
Canada only
1
1-8. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear-facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child restraint system on
STEP 1
the rear seat facing the rear of the
vehicle.
STEP 2
STEP 3
166
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
1-8. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
■ Forward-facing Convertible seat
Place the child restraint system on
STEP 1
the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
167
Before driving
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
1
1-8. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child restraint system is securely in
place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
■ Booster seat
Place the booster seat on the seat
STEP 1
facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 5
STEP 2
Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit
the seat belt to the booster seat
according to the manufacturer's
instructions and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 109)
168
1-8. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
1
Before driving
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
STEP 1
STEP 2
Secure the child restraint using a
seat belt or the lower anchors, and
move the head restraint in place at
the lowest position. (P. 106)
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
169
1-8. Safety information
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder
belt. (P. 111)
In ALR lock mode, the belt is locked in the position and cannot be extended, which
could cause injury or discomfort to the child seated in the booster seat.
170
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat or rear
seats so that it does not interfere with the
child restraint system.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat, move
the seat as far back as possible even if the
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death
or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
171
1
Before driving
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be sure it
is secure.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure
the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve
or accident.
172
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving the vehicle................... 174
Cruise control......................... 233
Power (ignition) switch .......... 184
EV drive mode......................... 188
Dynamic radar cruise
control .................................... 237
Transmission.............................. 190
Intuitive parking assist.......... 250
Turn signal lever....................... 195
LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist)....... 258
Parking brake........................... 196
Brake Hold ................................ 199
Horn ............................................ 201
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters.............. 202
Indicators and warning
lights ........................................ 207
Multi-information
display....................................... 211
Electronically modulated
air suspension....................... 265
Advanced parking
guidance system................... 267
Driving assist systems........... 308
Pre-Collision System............. 315
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ............... 326
Vehicle load limits.................. 329
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch...................... 216
Winter driving tips.................. 331
Trailer towing .......................... 335
Dinghy towing......................... 336
Automatic High Beam......... 220
Fog light switch ....................... 226
Windshield wipers and
washer ................................... 228
Headlight cleaner switch.... 232
173
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:
■ Starting the hybrid system (P. 184)
■ Driving
STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to “D”.
(P. 190)
STEP 2 Release the parking brake.
(P. 196)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
STEP 1 With the shift lever in “D”, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
STEP 3
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to “P”.
(P. 190)
■ Parking the vehicle
STEP 1 With the shift lever in “D”, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 Set the parking brake.
(P. 196)
STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to “P”.
(P. 190)
STEP 4 Press the “POWER” switch to stop the hybrid system.
STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
Starting on a steep uphill
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
174
Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to “D”.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Starting off on a hill
175
2
When driving
Hill-start assist control will operate. (P. 308)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because
there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to
observe:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in the low range in the “S” position.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 548)
2-1. Driving procedures
■ For efficient use
● Put the shift lever into “D” when driving.
In the “N” position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. The hybrid battery (traction battery) will be discharged, requiring
unnecessary engine power to recharge.
● Drive your vehicle smoothly.
Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.
● Avoid repeated acceleration.
Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power,
resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with
the accelerator pedal slightly released.
● Put the shift lever into “P” when parking.
In the “N” position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge.
Leaving the shift lever in the “N” position for an extended period of time may
discharge the hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid battery is discharged.
176
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the vehicle
177
2
When driving
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid system
operating. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● The driver should pay attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only
by the electric motor (traction motor). Because there is no engine noise, the
pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in “R”.
Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver
drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Do not shift the shift lever to “P” while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to “R” while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to “D” while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● Moving the shift lever to “N” while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid
system. Engine braking is not available with the hybrid system disengaged.
● During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer
and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way: P. 544
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 190)
● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may
result in death or serious injury.
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not
outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not drive the vehicle off-road.
This is not a AWD vehicle designed for real off-road driving. Proceed with all due
caution if it becomes unavoidable to drive off-road.
● Do not drive across river crossings or through other bodies of water.
This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage the
hybrid system or cause other serious damage to the vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
178
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
179
2
When driving
your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting
or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the hybrid system.
If the vehicle is in any positions other than “P” or “N”, the vehicle may accelerate
suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the “READY” indicator is on. Apply the parking
brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the
exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is
nearby.
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to “P”, stop the hybrid system
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the hybrid system is operating.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes and the rear bumper diffusers while the hybrid
system is operating or immediately after turning the hybrid system off.
Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where
it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is
operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
■ Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the hybrid system. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may
lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by
corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
180
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving,
as this may restrain driving torque.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at
the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
181
2
When driving
Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to
hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a
serious health hazard.
■ When braking the vehicle
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases
when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, even though the brakes still operate, the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Braking distance also becomes longer.
● The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems
fails, the others will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer. If this happens, do
not continue to drive the vehicle. If the brake system warning light (red indicator)
comes on together with buzzer sound while driving, immediately stop the vehicle
in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck or bogged
Do not spin the wheels recklessly when any of the tires is up in the air, or stuck in
sand or mud, etc. This may damage the drive system components or propel the
vehicle forward (or in another direction) and cause an accident.
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in “P”. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or
the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If a brake pad wear warning message is displayed
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced braking power. As
a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore,
when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (P. 517)
182
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads
183
2
When driving
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid system
transmission, differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
2-1. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on
your person starts the hybrid system or changes “POWER” switch modes.
■ Starting the hybrid system
STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “POWER” switch indicator turns green.
STEP 4
Press the “POWER” switch.
After a while, the “READY” indicator comes on with a beep
sound.
The vehicle can move when the
“READY” indicator is on even if
the engine is stopped.
The hybrid system can be
started from any “POWER”
switch mode.
STEP 5
Check that the “READY” indicator is on.
The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off.
184
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Changing “POWER” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “POWER” switch with the
brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is
pressed.)
OFF*
The emergency flashers can be
used.
2
ACCESSORY mode
When driving
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
The “POWER” switch indicator
turns amber.
ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “POWER” switch indicator
turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than “P” when turning off
the hybrid system, the “POWER”
switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to OFF.
185
2-1. Driving procedures
■ If the hybrid system does not start
The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 133)
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
The green indicator light on the “POWER”
switch will flash and a message will be shown
on the multi-information display. Press the
“POWER” switch again while turning the
steering wheel left and right.
■ When the “POWER” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■ If the “READY” indicator does not come on
If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you press the “POWER” switch
with the shift lever in “P” and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Lexus dealer
immediately.
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever
in “P”, the “POWER” switch will automatically turn off.
■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions
It may take time until the “READY” indicator comes on.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
P. 39
■ When the hybrid system is malfunctioning
P. 505
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 61
186
2-1. Driving procedures
■ When the electronic key battery is discharged
P. 474
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 59
■ Note for the entry function
P. 62
2
CAUTION
Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency
If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
push and hold the “POWER” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “POWER” switch while driving except in an emergency.
Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking
control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged
Do not leave the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods
of time without the hybrid system on.
■ When starting the hybrid system
● Do not race a cold hybrid system.
● If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have the hybrid system checked
immediately by your Lexus dealer.
187
When driving
■ When starting the hybrid system
2-1. Driving procedures
EV drive mode
In EV drive mode the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the
hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle.
This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning or
late at night, or indoor parking lot etc. without concern for noises and gas
emissions.
On/off
When EV drive mode is turned
on, the EV drive mode indicator
will come on. Pressing the
switch when in EV drive mode
will return to normal driving
(using the gasoline engine and
electric motor [traction motor]).
■ Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on
It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multiinformation display.
● The temperature of the hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.
● The temperature of the hybrid system is low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 32F (0C) for a
long period of time etc.
● The gasoline engine is warming up.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.
An “Energy Monitor” display of level 3 or lower may indicate a low battery level.
(P. 41)
● Vehicle speed is about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
● The windshield defogger is in use.
188
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
When driving in EV drive mode, pay special attention to the area around the vehicle. Because there is no engine noise, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other
people and vehicles in the area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or
approaching them, so take extra care while driving.
189
2
When driving
When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in
the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and
the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is level 2
or lower. (P. 41)
● Vehicle speed becomes more than about 25 mph (40 km/h).
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
When it is possible to inform the driver of automatic cancelation in advance, a prior
notice screen will appear on the multi-information display.
■ Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode
Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode is up to about 1/2 mile (1 km)
if driven at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. (Possible driving distance
depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)
■ Fuel economy
LS600hL is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal
driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in
EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.
2-1. Driving procedures
Transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■ Shifting the shift lever
While the “POWER” switch is in ON mode, depress the brake
pedal and move the shift lever.
■ Shift position uses
Shift position
Function
P
Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*1
S
“S” mode driving*2 (P. 192)
*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the “D”
position for normal driving.
*2: By
selecting shift ranges using “S” mode, you can control engine braking
forces.
190
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Selecting a driving mode
The following modes can be selected in any shift position to suit driving conditions:
Power mode
For powerful acceleration
and driving in mountainous
regions
Normal mode
Snow mode
For accelerating and driving
on slippery road surfaces,
such as on snow
To cancel power mode or snow
mode, press the same side of
the switch again.
2
When driving
Eco drive mode
When Eco drive mode is turned
on, the “ECO MODE” indicator
will come on.
Pressing the “ECO MODE”
switch again turns Eco drive
mode off.
191
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in “S” mode
Shift the shift lever to the “S” position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in “S” mode is set automatically to “4”, “5”, “6” or “7”
according to vehicle speed.
■ Shift ranges and their functions
● You can choose from 8 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air
conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. (P. 341) To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
192
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Downshifting restrictions in “S” mode
The shift lever cannot be downshifted if the following speeds are exceeded. (A
buzzer will sound twice in this situation.)
Maximum speed
Downshifting
mph (km/h)
120 (193)
65
96 (154)
54
76 (122)
43
55 (89)
32
47 (76)
21
35 (57)
2
When driving
76
■ When in heavy traffic
If the shift lever is in “N”, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged. To
help prevent the battery from discharging, avoid putting the shift lever in “N” for an
extended period of time.
■ “S” mode
● When the shift range is “6” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the
shift range to “8”.
● When the shift range is “6” or higher, moving the shift lever toward “-” may
change down by 2 shift ranges or more depending on driving conditions.
● To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.
■ When driving with the cruise control system
Engine braking will not occur in “S” mode, even when downshifting to “7”, “6”, “5”
or “4”. (P. 233, 237)
■ Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the “POWER” switch is turned OFF
after driving in snow mode.
■ Eco drive mode
When the vehicle is driven in Eco drive mode, vehicle driving force and operation of
the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) is controlled to improve fuel efficiency. If Eco drive mode is turned on when the driving mode is in power mode or
snow mode, power mode or snow mode will be canceled.
193
2-1. Driving procedures
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”
P. 528
CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.
194
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(move the lever partway and
then release it)
The right hand signals will flash
3 times.
2
When driving
Lane change to the left
(move the lever partway and
then release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the turn signal lights has not burned out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.
■ To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change
Operate the lever in the opposite direction.
■ Customization
The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.
(Customizable featuresP. 573)
195
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
For the parking brake, an electrical parking brake system is adopted.
■ Manual mode
Sets the parking brake
U.S.A.
Canada
The parking brake indicator
light will come on. (P. 197)
Press and hold the parking
brake switch if an emergency
occurs and it is necessary to
operate the parking brake while
driving.
Releases the parking brake
Operate the parking brake
switch while depressing the
brake pedal. Make sure that the
parking brake indicator light
goes off.
■ Automatic mode
On/off
The parking brake is set automatically according to shift lever
operation.
Operate the shift lever with the
brake pedal depressed.
● When the shift lever is moved
out of “P”
The parking brake will be
released.
● When the shift lever is moved
into “P”
The parking brake will be set.
196
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Parking brake operation
● When the “POWER” switch is not in ON mode, the parking brake cannot be
197
2
When driving
released using the parking brake switch.
● When the “POWER” switch is not in ON mode, automatic mode (automatic
brake setting and releasing) is not available.
● If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from
operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.
■ Parking brake indicator light
● Depending on the “POWER” switch mode, the parking brake indicator light will
come on and stay on as described below:
ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released.
Not in ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.
● When the “POWER” switch is turned OFF with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate
a malfunction.
■ Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 504, 514)
Depending on the condition, the parking brake indicator light may flash.
■ Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (P. 331)
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to “P” and
make sure that the vehicle does not move.
■ When the system malfunctions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.
■ When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction
Use the parking brake release tool to manually release the parking brake.
(P. 529)
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
198
2-1. Driving procedures
Brake Hold
The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in
“D”, “S” or “N” with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed
to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator
pedal is depressed with the shift lever in “D” or “S” to allow smooth start off.
Turns the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator comes on. While the system
is holding the brake, the brake
hold operated indicator light
comes on.
2
When driving
■ Brake hold system operating conditions
The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:
● The trunk or hood is not closed.
● The driver's door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat belt.
If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled,
the system will turn off and the brake hold operated indicator light will go off. In
addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake,
a warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information
display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.
199
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Brake hold function
● If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the sys-
tem has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In
this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.
● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the
brake pedal and press the switch again.
● The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep
incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes.
The multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation.
■ When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the
brakes
The parking brake will not be released automatically. Release the parking brake by
operating the parking brake switch, making sure that the parking brake indicator
light goes off. (P. 196)
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 504, 514)
CAUTION
■ When stopped on a slippery road
The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been
exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long
period of time. Turning the “POWER” switch OFF while the system is holding the
brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the “POWER” switch, depress the brake pedal, set the parking brake and shift
the shift lever to “P”.
200
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.
2
When driving
201
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the “POWER”
switch is in ON mode.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Multi-information display
P. 211
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Hybrid System Indicator
Displays hybrid system power output and regenerative charging level
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset buttons
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
202
2-2. Instrument cluster
Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different
distances independently.
Outside temperature
The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40°F (-40°C) to
122°F (50°C)
Shift position and shift range
2
P. 190
When driving
Instrument panel light control buttons
203
2-2. Instrument cluster
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset buttons
Changes the display
Resets the trip meter currently
displayed to “0”
Instrument panel light control buttons
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
204
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Hybrid System Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco
driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will
turn on.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not operate in the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in anything other than
2
● The driving mode is set to EV drive
When driving
“D”.
mode, power mode or snow mode.
(P. 188, 191)
● The vehicle speed is approximately 80
mph (130 km/h) or higher.
Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is
being exceeded (during full power driving
etc.)
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an
Eco-friendly manner.
Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not
being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically
stop and restart under various conditions.
Charge area
Shows that energy is being recovered via
the regenerative brake.
205
2-2. Instrument cluster
● By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can
be achieved.
● Charge area indicates regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used
to charge the battery.
● Eco Driving Indicator Light and Hybrid System Indicator can be activated or
deactivated. (P. 213)
*: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.
■ Engine speed
On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve
fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc.
There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.
■ Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H) or
the high coolant temperature warning light comes on or flashes. In this case,
immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has
cooled completely. (P. 539)
206
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
2
When driving
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
Center panel
207
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 195)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 233, 237)
Headlight high beam indicator (P. 217)
EV drive mode indicator
(P. 188)
*3 Automatic High Beam
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
indicator (P. 220)
Eco Driving Indicator
Light (P. 205)
Headlight indicator
(P. 216)
“ECO MODE” indicator
(P. 191)
Tail light indicator
(P. 216)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 226)
“Hybrid PWR” indicator
(P. 191)
(P. 218)
*1, 2 Slip indicator
(P. 309)
*1 VSC off indicator
(P. 310)
“Hybrid SNOW”
indicator (P. 191)
“SPORT” mode indicator
(P. 265)
*1 Brake hold standby indi-
“COMFORT” mode indicator (P. 265)
cator (P. 199)
*1 Brake hold operated indicator (P. 199)
208
*1 “AFS OFF” indicator
*1 “HEIGHT HIGH”
indicator (P. 265)
2-2. Instrument cluster
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 196)
(Canada)
*1 “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator
(P. 153)
(if equipped)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 196)
Lane keeping assist indicator (P. 258)
“READY” indicator
(P. 184)
2
When driving
209
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 504)
*1
*1
*1
(U.S.A.)
*1
(Canada)
*
*
*
1
*
3
(U.S.A.)
*
1
1
*1
1
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
*
*
1, 3
*1
(Canada)
*
1
*1
*1
*1, 3
(if equipped)
3
*1
*1: These lights turn on when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode
to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off
after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a
malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do
not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light not
come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this
occurs.
210
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data.
● Trip information
(P. 212)
Displays cruising range, fuel consumption and other cruising
related information
● Intuitive parking assist display*
(P. 250)
2
When driving
● Dynamic radar cruise control display* (if equipped)
(P. 237)
● Lane-keeping assist display*
(if equipped)
(P. 258)
● Turn-by-turn navigation
(P. 214)
● Warning messages
(P. 514)
Automatically displayed when a
malfunction occurs in one of the
vehicle’s systems
*: Automatically displayed when
the system is used
211
2-2. Instrument cluster
Trip information
“DISP” switch
Items displayed can be switched by
pressing the “DISP” switch.
“RESET” switch
■ Energy monitor
Displays the status of the hybrid system (P. 41)
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the
quantity of fuel remaining
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As
a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may
not be updated.
When refueling, turn the “POWER” switch off. If the vehicle is refueled
without turning the “POWER” switch off, the display may not be
updated.
■ Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.
• The function can be reset by pressing the “RESET” switch when the
average fuel consumption is displayed.
The “Past record” screen on the touch screen will also be updated.
(P. 41)
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■ Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
212
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■ Distance after refueling
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the vehicle was
last refueled
2
The function can be reset by pressing the “RESET” switch when the elapsed
time is displayed.
■ Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset
The function can be reset by pressing the “RESET” switch when the average
vehicle speed is displayed.
■ Tire inflation pressure
Displays inflation pressure of each tire. There is no correlation between
the order of the displayed values and the tire positions.
It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the
“POWER” switch is turned to ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to
display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.
■ Customization
Settings such as character size and which items are displayed can be
changed.
Pressing the “DISP” switch for 1 second or more when the vehicle is stopped
shows the customization menu screen.
This screen shows the details of customizable items and instructions for customizing. Follow these instructions to change the settings.
Settings cannot be changed while the cruise control switch is set to on.
213
When driving
■ Elapsed time
Displays the elapsed time since it was last reset
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be
different from the values measured using other gauges.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting 12-volt battery terminals
The following information will be reset:
● Cruising range
● Average fuel consumption
● Average fuel consumption after refueling
● Distance after refueling
● Elapsed time
● Average vehicle speed
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
■ Turn-by-turn navigation
Turn direction
The turn-by-turn navigation appears only
while route guidance of the navigation system
is being performed. When a turn
approaches, the distance to the turn and the
turn direction are displayed.
The turn-by-turn navigation can be set to on
or off using the customization feature.
(P. 213)
Distance to the next turn
214
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
■ Turn-by-turn navigation image
The image shown may differ from the actual intersection.
2
When driving
215
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Type A
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, daytime running lights and
instrument panel lights
turn on.
The headlights and all
lights
listed
above
(except daytime running
lights) turn on.
The headlights, other
exterior lights and instrument panel lights turn on
and off automatically.
(When the “POWER”
switch is in ON mode)
216
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, daytime running lights and
instrument panel lights
turn on.
The headlights and all
lights
listed
above
(except daytime running
lights) turn on.
2
When driving
The headlights, other
exterior lights and instrument panel lights turn on
and off automatically.
(When the “POWER”
switch is in ON mode)
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on
the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release to turn them off. You can
flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
217
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
AFS
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) improves visibility at intersections
and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light axis of
the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire
angle that are controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher
■ Deactivating AFS
On/off
The indicator turns on when the
AFS is deactivated.
■ Daytime running light system
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on auto-
matically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the hybrid system is started and the
parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at
night.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers
greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel
economy.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
218
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights come on: The headlights turn off 30 seconds after a door
NOTICE
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
219
2
When driving
is opened and closed if the “POWER” switch has been switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The lights turn off immediately if
on the key
is pressed after all doors are locked.)
● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
“POWER” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF and
driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode, or turn the light
or
position.
switch off once and then back to
■ Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■ If the “AFS OFF” indicator flashes...
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 573)
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Automatic High Beam
The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the
brightness of streetlights, the lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles,
etc., and automatically turns high beam on or off as necessary.
■ Activating the Automatic High Beam system
Type A
Headlight switch in “AUTO”
STEP 1
position.
220
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
STEP 1
Headlight switch in “AUTO”
position.
2
When driving
STEP 2
Push the lever away from you.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the
headlights are turned on automatically to indicate that the system is active.
221
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ High beam automatic turning on or off conditions
When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be
automatically turned on (after approximately 1 second):
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h).
● The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
● There are no oncoming or preceding vehicles with headlights or
tail lights turned on.
If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned off:
● Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
● The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
● Oncoming or preceding vehicles have headlights or tail lights
turned on.
■ Turning the high beam on/off manually
Switching to low beam
Pull the lever to original position.
222
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Switching to high beam
Turn the light switch to
position.
2
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Camera sensor detection information
● High beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:
• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve.
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another.
● High beam may be turned off if an oncoming vehicle that is using fog lights without using the headlights is detected.
● House lights, street lights, red traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs
may cause the high beam to turn off.
● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn high beam on
or off:
• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles
• Road conditions (wetness, ice, snow etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of baggage
● High beam may be turned on or off when unexpected by the driver.
223
When driving
■ The Automatic High Beam can be operated when
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
● In the situations below, the system may not be able to correctly detect the sur-
rounding brightness levels, and may flash or expose nearby pedestrians to the
high beam. Therefore, you should consider turning the high beams on or off
manually rather than relying on the Automatic High Beam system.
• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)
• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.
• The windshield is cracked or damaged.
• The inside rear view mirror or camera sensor is deformed or dirty.
• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or
fog lights.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color, or have are not aimed properly.
• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and
darkness
• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or
roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads,
gravel tracks etc.)
• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road
• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.
• The vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty.
• The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.
• The Automatic High Beam indicator is flashing.
• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to
other drivers or pedestrians nearby.
■ If the Automatic High Beam indicator flashes
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Temporary lowering sensor sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
To lower the sensitivity, push and hold the “AUTO” button on the inside rear view
mirror for 15 to 20 seconds, and release. The indicator light on the inside rear view
mirror will flash to indicate that the sensitivity has been lowered.
When the “POWER” switch is turned off, the sensitivity will be returned to its normal level.
■ Customization
The Automatic High Beam can be turned off.
(Customizable features P. 573)
224
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
CAUTION
■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam
Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and turning high beam on or off manually if necessary.
NOTICE
2
■ Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system
● Do not touch the camera sensor.
● Do not subject the inside rear view mirror or the camera sensor to a strong
impact.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not spill liquid onto the inside rear view mirror or the camera sensor.
● Do not apply window tinting or stickers to the camera sensor or the area of windshield near the camera sensor.
● Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the camera sensor
will mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights, the headlights of
other vehicles, etc.
● Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the inside
rear view mirror and the camera sensor.
● Do not overload the vehicle.
● Do not modify the vehicle.
● Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
225
When driving
Observe the following to ensure that the
Automatic High Beam functions correctly.
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
Type A
Turns the front fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights on
226
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
Turns the front fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights on
2
When driving
227
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the
sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
Type A
Rain-sensing wiper operation
Low speed wiper operation
High speed wiper operation
Temporary operation
228
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type B
Rain-sensing wiper operation
Low speed wiper operation
High speed wiper operation
Temporary operation
2
When driving
229
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Increases the sensitivity
Decreases the sensitivity
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(After operating several times,
the wipers operate one more
time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
If the headlights are on, the
headlight cleaner will operate
once.
■ The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
With the settings other than “AUTO” also, the time until drip prevention wiper
sweep occurs is changed depending on vehicle speed.
With low speed wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from
low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest, the mode cannot
be switched.)
230
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Raindrop sensor
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of
raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are
present on the windshield.
2
● If the wiper switch is turned to “AUTO” position while the “POWER” switch is in
● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 194F (90C) or higher, or 5F
(-15C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate
the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or
anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
231
When driving
ON mode, the wiper operate once to show that auto mode is activated.
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight cleaner switch
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.
■ Windshield washer linked operation
When the windshield washer is operated with the “POWER” switch in ON mode
and the headlights on, the headlight cleaner will operate once. (P. 228)
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the switch is pressed continually.
232
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Indicator
Cruise control switch
2
STEP 1
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
: If equipped
233
When driving
■ Setting the vehicle speed
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.
■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
234
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the “D” or range “4” or higher of “S” has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
235
2
When driving
resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by
first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever
down to set the new speed.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40km/h).
● VSC is activated.
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death
or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● During emergency towing
236
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic radar cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in
order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
Type A
Type B
■ Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
STEP 1
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
: If equipped
237
2
When driving
Indicator
Display
Set speed
Cruise control switch
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button
2-4. Using other driving systems
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
■ Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is displayed.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held
When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds the lever is held
238
2-4. Using other driving systems
In the constant speed control mode (P. 243), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is set automatically to long
mode when the “POWER”
switch is turned to ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of
you, the preceding vehicle mark
will also be displayed.
■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium
Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
239
2
When driving
■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Pressing the button changes the
Preceding vehicle mark
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as
follows:
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Canceling and resuming the speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the cruise control and returns
vehicle speed to the set
speed.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than
approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
240
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up
to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicleto-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.
2
When driving
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically
decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the
system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in
on the vehicle ahead.
241
2-4. Using other driving systems
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the
set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
Approach warning
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this
would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a
vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not
occur:
● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your
vehicle speed
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● At the instant the accelerator is applied
242
2-4. Using other driving systems
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode differs from vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode. When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed regardless of whether or not there are other
vehicles in the lane ahead.
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
Switch to constant speed control mode.
(Push the lever forward and
hold for approximately 1 second.)
When in constant speed control
mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, push
the lever forward again and hold
for approximately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been
set, it is not possible to return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.
If the “POWER” switch is turned
off and then turned to ON mode
again, the vehicle will automatically
return to vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
243
When driving
Cruise control indicator will come
on.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
Adjusting the speed setting:
P. 238
Canceling and resuming the speed
setting: P. 240
■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the “D” or range “4” or higher of “S” has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may
decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed. (when the wiper switch is set
to the “AUTO” mode or the high speed wiper operation position).
● When snow mode is set.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
set vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
244
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
2
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 505, 514)
245
When driving
■ Warning lights, messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
246
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
247
2
When driving
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver's own vehicle and a designated
vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive
driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver's own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is
appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision
with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in
order to ensure the safety of all involved.
■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and
down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to expressways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
● During emergency towing
■ When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (P. 242) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident
may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
248
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
249
2
When driving
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may
result:
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the functioning of the radar sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.)
● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Intuitive parking assist
The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via
the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or
maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when
using this system.
■ Types of sensors
Front side sensors
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
■ Intuitive parking assist switch
On/off
When on, the indicator light
comes on and the buzzer
sounds to inform the driver that
the system is operational.
Press the button to switch the
on/off mode.
250
2-4. Using other driving systems
Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle, the graphic is shown on the multiinformation display and touch screen according to position and distance
to the obstacle.
■ Multi-information display
■ Touch screen
When the vehicle is moving forward
The graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set so
that the graphic is not displayed.
(P. 255)
When the vehicle is moving backward
A simplified image is displayed on
the right upper corner of the touch
screen when an obstacle is
detected.
251
2
When driving
Front side sensors and front corner sensors operation
Front center sensors operation
Rear corner sensors operation
Rear center sensors operation
2-4. Using other driving systems
The distance display and buzzer
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate
distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
Center sensors
Level
1
2
3
4
Slow
Medium
Fast
Continuous
2
3
4
Medium
Fast
Continuous
Display
example of
front center
sensor
Buzzer
Corner sensors and side sensors
252
Level
1
Display
example of
front right
sensor
-
Buzzer
-
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Detection level and approximate distance to an obstacle
1
2
3
Front side
sensors
-
1.6 to 1.2 ft.
1.2 to 1.0 ft.
(50 to 37.5 cm) (37.5 to 30 cm)
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
or less
Front corner
sensors
-
2.0 to 1.2 ft.
1.2 to 1.0 ft.
(60 to 37.5 cm) (37.5 to 30 cm)
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
or less
Front center
3.3 to 1.6 ft.
1.6 to 1.2 ft.
1.2 to 1.0 ft.
sensors
(100 to 50 cm) (50 to 37.5 cm) (37.5 to 30 cm)
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
or less
Rear corner
sensors
-
2.0 to 1.2 ft.
1.2 to 0.8 ft
(60 to 37.5 cm) (37.5 to 25 cm)
0.8 ft. (25 cm)
or less
Rear center
sensors
4.9 to 2.0 ft.
(150 to 60 cm)
2.0 to 1.5 ft.
(60 to 45 cm)
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
or less
1.5 to 1.1 ft.
(45 to 35 cm)
4
253
2
When driving
Level
2-4. Using other driving systems
Sensors that operate and detection range
The following diagrams show the sensor detection range. Note that sensors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close to the
vehicle.
■ Sensors that operate
Forward
Backward
■ Detection range of the sensors
Approx. 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
Approx. 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
Approx. 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
Approx. 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors may not be able to detect
obstacles that are extremely close
to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object etc.
254
2-4. Using other driving systems
Customization of the intuitive parking assist
The buzzer volume, display and buzzer timing and display of the graphic
on the screen can be customized.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Press “SETUP” to display the “Setup” screen. (P. 339)
Touch “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Touch “LEXUS Park Assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
Alert volume setting
Display on/off
Alert distance setting
2
When driving
255
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Sensor detection information
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
• A sensor is frozen.
• A sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines,
air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they
are.
● The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
■ Touch screen display
If an obstacle is detected while the vehicle is reversing, the warning indicator will
appear in the top right of the screen even if the display setting has been set to “Off”.
256
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ If the display flashes and a message is displayed
P. 514
■ Certification (Canada only)
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
CAUTION
2
■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist
NOTICE
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
257
When driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
2-4. Using other driving systems
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
While driving on a freeway or motor highway that has lane markings, this
system recognizes the lanes using a camera as a sensor to assist the driver
with staying in the lane. The LKA system has two functions.
■ Lane departure warning function
If the system judges that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, it
alerts the driver using rapid beeping, indications on the multi-information display, and sensory warning* via the steering wheel.
*: A slight steering torque is applied for a short period of time in the
direction of the center of the lane.
■ Lane keeping assist function
This function will be active when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode of the cruise control (P. 237) is set with vehicle speed
above approximately 45 mph (72 km/h) while the lane departure
warning function is active. When the lane keeping assist function is
active, a slight steering torque will be applied, to help the driver
maintain the vehicle in a central position within the lane.
■ Turning the LKA system on
The lane departure warning function and lane keeping assist function will be activated depending on the recognition condition of lane
markings, vehicle speed and the setting of radar cruise control
(vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode).
Press the “LKA” switch to activate the system.
Press the switch again to turn
the LKA system off.
: If equipped
258
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Operating conditions for each function
LKA system
Lane keeping
assist function
Vehicle speed is
between about
30 and 125
mph
(48 and 200
km/h)
Vehicle speed is
between about
45 and 112 mph
(72 and 180
km/h)
Off
Available
Not Available
On
While cruising in vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode with the
set vehicle speed
approximately 44 mph
(71 km/h) or less
Available
Not Available
On
While cruising in vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode with the
set vehicle speed
approximately 45 mph
(72 km/h) or more
Available
Available
Cruise control
(Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control
mode)
2
When driving
On
Lane departure warning
function
259
2-4. Using other driving systems
Indications on the multi-information display
While the LKA system is on, the lane line display and steering wheel display are shown on the multi-information display to inform the driver that
the LKA system is on.
Steering wheel display
When the steering wheel display is
shown:
The lane keeping assist function is
active.
Dynamic radar cruise control
display
Lane line display
When outlines of the lane lines are
shown:
A lane marking is not recognized
by the system, or the LKA system
functions are temporarily cancelled. (When the lane keeping
assist function is cancelled, the signal will beep twice.)
When solid lane lines are shown:
The lane departure warning function is active.
260
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Temporary cancellation of the LKA system functions
If any of the following occurs, the LKA system functions will be temporarily cancelled. The functions will resume after the necessary operating conditions have
returned.
● The turn signal lever is operated.
● The steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to cause the vehicle to change
lanes.
2
● The brake pedal is depressed.
● The vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LKA system func-
tions.
● While the lane lines cannot be recognized while driving.
● The wiper operates continuously.
■ When the lane departure warning function is activated
The lane departure warning function will be temporarily canceled and will not
resume until a few seconds elapse after it is activated.
■ Hands-free driving warning
If the steering wheel is not operated for about 15 seconds on a straight road or
about 5 seconds on a curve, the signal will beep twice, indications on the multiinformation display will flash, and the lane keeping assist function will be temporarily
cancelled. If you drive the vehicle with your hands lightly touching the steering
wheel, it may also be detected as hands-free driving.
■ When the vehicle has been parked under the scorching sun or when the temper-
ature in the cabin is extremely low
The LKA system functions may not be available for a while after driving of the vehicle has been started. In such cases, turn the LKA system off and turn it on again
after normal temperature returns. When the temperature in the cabin decreases or
increases, and the temperature around the camera sensor becomes appropriate
for its operation, the functions will begin operating. (P. 264)
261
When driving
The lane keeping assist function will not resume even after the brake pedal is
released because depressing the brake pedal also cancels the dynamic radar
cruise control.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Before using the LKA system
Do not rely on the LKA system to remain within a selected lane. The LKA system is
not designed to enable inattentive driving. The steering wheel should be operated
by the driver to maintain the vehicle in a suitable position within its lane. Always
drive carefully.
■ Turn the LKA off while driving in any of the following conditions:
Do not use LKA in any of the following situations. Otherwise, the system may not
function correctly and could result in an accident.
● When driving with snow tires, snow chains, a spare tire, or similar equipment.
● When driving with non-standard parts or aftermarket equipment installed.
(including modified tires and suspensions, etc.)
● When there are objects or structures along the roadside that might be misinter-
preted as lane markers. (such as guardrails, curb, reflector posts, etc.)
● Where there are wheel ruts, icy trademarks, etc. or if snow remains on the road
surface.
● When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers, or if a
shadow covers the lane markers.
● When there are visible lines on the pavement from road repairs, or if the remains
of old lane markers are still visible on the road.
● When driving on slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow.
● When driving in a lane other than the driving or passing lanes on a freeway, high-
way or motorway.
● When driving on a road with lane closures due to maintenance, or when driving
in a temporary lane.
● When driving on winding roads or roads that are rough or uneven.
262
2-4. Using other driving systems
NOTICE
■ In the following situations, the LKA will not work, or will not perform reliably:
● When lane markers are interrupted or are not present, such as before a tollbooth
(tollgate).
● When lane markers are only on one side of the road.
● When driving on a sharp curve.
● When lanes are extremely narrow or extremely wide.
● When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy load or
● When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is
extremely short.
● When the lane markers are broken, “Botts’ dots”, or “Raised pavement marker”.
● When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc.
● When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete.
● When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light.
● When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as the
entrance to or exit from a tunnel.
● When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly into the
camera lens.
● When driving on roads that are branching or merging.
● When pavement lane markers are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, etc.
● When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall, standing
water, etc.
● When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when driving
on an extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement.
● When headlight brightness is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or when the
headlights are misaligned.
● When driving with a strong crosswind.
263
When driving
improper tire inflation pressure.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
NOTICE
■ Camera sensor
Observe the following to ensure that the LKA
system functions correctly.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
LKA performance may deteriorate due to the presence of raindrops, condensation, ice or snow on the windshield.
● Do not attach a sticker or other items to the windshield near the camera sensor.
● When adjusting the rear view mirror, make sure that it does not block the camera
lens.
● When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the upper
part of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on the images. In
such a case, use the windshield defogger to provide warm, dry air to the windshield.
● Do not place anything on the dashboard.
The camera sensor may recognize the image reflected on the windshield as lane
markers by mistake.
● Do not scratch the camera lens, or let it get dirty.
● Do not change the installation position of the camera sensor or remove it. The
direction of the camera sensor is precisely adjusted.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to strong impact or force, and do not disas-
semble the camera sensor.
264
2-4. Using other driving systems
Electronically modulated air suspension
The vehicle adjusts the damping of the shock absorbers and maintains vehicle height automatically in response to driving conditions to help provide
enhanced driving comfort and vehicle control.
■ Vehicle height adjustment
The vehicle’s height is maintained at the selected level regardless of the
number of occupants and luggage weight.
Turn the “HEIGHT HIGH”
switch on.
Press the switch once more to
cancel the high mode.
■ Damping mode selection
You can select the damping mode of the shock absorbers.
Sport
The indicator light comes on.
Normal
Comfort
The indicator light comes on.
■ Operating sound of the air suspension compressor
When the vehicle height is lowered, such as when entering or loading the vehicle,
or high mode is selected, the compressor may operate and a whirring sound may
be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
265
When driving
The indicator light comes on.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Be sure to stop the hybrid system in the following situations in order to stop oper-
ation of the electronically modulated air suspension:
● The vehicle is parked on a curb.
● Any of the wheels is stuck in a ditch.
● It is necessary to jack up the vehicle.
● It is necessary to tow the vehicle with part of it lifted.
If the “POWER” switch remains in ON mode, the vehicle height may change, and
you may catch part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in accidental damage.
266
2-4. Using other driving systems
Advanced parking guidance system
The advanced parking guidance system supports the driver during reverse
parking by displaying a rear-view image. When in assist mode, the system
controls the steering wheel to help the driver reverse the vehicle into a target parking position set on the screen.
The illustrations of the display shown are examples only and may differ
from actual images. When parking in a space on the opposite side to
that shown in the examples, be sure to substitute left for right and vice
versa when operating the steering wheel.
If you move the lever out of “R”
position, the advanced parking
guidance system will be deactivated.
As the advanced parking guidance system only assists with parking in
a set target parking position, there are times when the system will be
unable to render this assistance, depending on factors such as road
surface or vehicle condition, or the distance to the set target parking
position.
The advanced parking guidance system is not an automatic parking
system. It is a system to assist back up parking.
267
When driving
Advanced parking guidance
system will activate when the
shift lever is in “R” position.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ About the screen
Parking assist mode button
Touching this button turns
parking assist mode on.
(P. 271)
Parallel parking assist mode
button
Touching this button turns
parallel parking assist mode
on. (P. 280)
■ Perpendicular parking
● Parking assist mode
(P. 271)
This mode assists the driver
during perpendicular parking
by automatically controlling
the steering wheel to move
the vehicle into the target
position set on the screen.
■ Parallel parking
● Parallel parking assist mode
(P. 280)
This mode assists the driver
during parallel parking by
automatically controlling the
steering wheel to move the
vehicle into the target position set on the screen.
268
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ APGS pre-support switch
Use this switch to turn on/off the pre-support function and to switch
assist mode between parallel parking assist mode and perpendicular parking assist mode.
Pre-support function OFF  Parallel parking assist mode pre-support screen  Perpendicular parking assist mode pre-support
screen  Pre-support function OFF
If the pre-support function cannot be used, two beeps will sound
(the beeps will not sound if the shift lever is in the “R” position).
269
2
When driving
Pressing the pre-support switch
while assist mode is on, the
“POWER” switch is in ON
mode and the vehicle is traveling below 9 mph (15 km/h) with
the shift position in any position
other than “P” or “R”, will cause
the screen to change in the following order:
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving precautions
When the grade behind the vehicle slopes up sharply, objects appear to
be farther away than they actually are.
When the grade behind the vehicle slopes down sharply, objects appear
to be closer than they actually are.
When any part of the vehicle sags
due to the number of passengers
or the distribution of the load,
there is a margin of error between
the set target parking position on
the screen, and the actual distance/course on the road.
270
2-4. Using other driving systems
Parking assist mode (Perpendicular parking)
■ Screen description
Parking assist mode assists the driver with perpendicular parking by
automatically controlling the steering wheel when backing up, in order to
park in the target position set on the screen.
If a message is displayed while maneuvering (P. 289)
2
When driving
Camera orientation confirmation lines
If the edge of the bumper displayed on the screen does not match the camera orientation confirmation lines, the camera may not be aligned correctly.
Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
Parking assist mode button
271
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Parking operation
● Pre-support function
Pre-support is useful for parking perpendicular to another vehicle. This
function detects the empty parking space beyond the parked vehicle and
then guides the driver to the correct starting position for reversing.
Chimes are used to inform the driver when it is time to turn the steering
wheel and when it is time to start reversing.
● Before backing up
When the pre-support function is in use
With the vehicle stopped or drivSTEP 1
ing at 9 mph (15 km/h) or less,
push the pre-support switch twice
when your vehicle is positioned
slightly before the target parking
space. (P. 269) Check that the
screen changes.
STEP 2
Move your vehicle slowly to a position perpendicular to and as close
as possible to the target parking
space.
Drive slowly enough to be able to
turn the steering wheel immediately after the chime sounds.
To discontinue the guidance, push
the pre-support switch once to
turn the pre-support function off.
(P. 269)
272
2-4. Using other driving systems
STEP 3
STEP 4
A chime will sound once when the
center of the target parking space
is visible right beside you. After this
chime has sounded, turn the steering wheel about half a turn or more
while driving forward.
To enter the target parking space
more accurately, position your
vehicle with a larger heading angle.
When the pre-support function is not in use
Move your vehicle slowly to a posiSTEP 1
tion perpendicular to the parking
space, and as close as possible to
the parking space.
Positioning the vehicle perpendicular to the parking space allows the
angle of the parking position to be
identified easily.
273
2
When driving
When the chime sounds twice,
stop your vehicle and straighten
the steering wheel.
2-4. Using other driving systems
STEP 2
Move your vehicle to a position
where you can see the center of
the parking space right besides
you.
To facilitate the setting of the target
parking position, the front side sensors detect the vehicles parked at
the left and right of the parking
space and identify the target parking position.
It is possible to identify the target
parking position even if there is
only a vehicle parked on one side
of the parking space.
If no vehicle or small vehicles are parked on both sides of the desired
parking space, stop with the steering wheel straight.
• By stopping the vehicle here, you can mostly identify the parking location, making it easier to set the target parking position.
• Make sure the steering wheel is straight when you stop. If not, the parking location cannot be identified.
• If you do not stop in front of the parking space, the system will refer to
the angle of the vehicle relative to the target parking space, and display
the target parking position (green or red frame) in the position used
last time the parking assist mode was activated.
Position your vehicle so that you
STEP 3
can enter the parking space, then
stop the vehicle with the steering
wheel straight.
To enter the target parking space
more accurately, position your
vehicle with a larger heading angle.
274
2-4. Using other driving systems
● While backing up
STEP 1
Place the shift lever in “R” position.
Touch
on the screen (only when the pre-support function
is not in use).
STEP 2
2
• You can also move the green frame by touching the screen (area other
than the arrow).
• There are tricks to align the green frame. (P. 277)
• Areas in which you are unable to park are displayed in red.
• If the frame is displayed in red, you cannot use the parking assist mode to
park in that location. (P. 294)
• When the green frame is displayed, if you begin backing up without touching “OK”, the message “Parking position has not been set.” appears. If you
continue to back up, you will hear a warning tone and the system will be
disabled.
• If the frame is red, there will be no guidance even if you begin backing up.
• If the orientation of the frame is opposite to that of the target parking
space, touch
.
• There may be times when, due to image distortion, the green frame does
not match the parking space lines on the road surface. In this case, attempt
an approximate match in an area where the warning flag does not overlap
with any parked vehicles or obstacles.
• You may adjust the target parking position even after starting the parking
assist mode.
275
When driving
Use the arrow to align the green frame with the desired parking space,
then touch “OK”.
2-4. Using other driving systems
STEP 3
Position yourself as you would when backing up normally, and rest your
hands on the steering wheel without applying any pressure. Check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle for safety, and slowly back up, using
the brake pedal to control the vehicle's speed.
If you touch “X”, assistance is canceled.
You can change the target parking position by touching
. If you are
backing up, or have already moved close to the target parking position,
will turn gray, and you will be unable to change the target.
Touch the arrows to move the target parking position, and then touch
“OK”.
276
2-4. Using other driving systems
STEP 4
Once the vehicle is mostly within the target parking position, voice guidance will inform you to finish the assist mode.
Check in front and behind the vehicle visually and check with the mirrors
while backing up.
■ Tips for setting the target parking position
Useful information for setting the target parking position (green frame)
● The display position of the green frame
The system decides the initial positioning of the green frame by the
position of the parking space detected by the front side sensors or the
position of the vehicle when it stops, and by detecting the white lines of
the parking space in the camera image to identify the parking space
location.
277
When driving
For safety, voice guidance is given slightly before the target parking position.
Furthermore, at that point system control will finish, so grip the steering wheel
firmly, and finish parking in the desired position, using the brake to control the
vehicle's speed.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
The front side sensors identify the parking space location and the white
lines near that location are detected.
The front side sensors cannot identify the parking space location, or
the parking space location maybe misaligned in the following situations.
• A vehicle is parked at the back of the parking space or the sensors
cannot detect a parked vehicle due to vehicle shape etc.
• The sensors cannot detect a pole or wall beside the parking space.
• The sensors detect a pedestrian or object near the parking space.
If the point at which you stop is correctly identified, the green frame will
display the parking space accurately. If the white lines of the parking
space have not been correctly identified, the green frame will not
match the parking space even if you stop in the correct location. In this
case, adjust the point at which you stop as needed.
● Aligning the green frame
There are two ways to align the green frame with the parking space,
either using the arrows on the screen, or by touching the screen at
points other than the arrows.
Using the arrows on the screen:
By touching the arrows displayed on the screen, you can move the
green frame.
278
2-4. Using other driving systems
Directly touching the target point:
2
Touch the front edge of the place you wish to move.
If you touch the following areas, the green frame will not move:
• The area surrounding the arrows.
• The area near the lower button on the screen.
• Areas too far away to park in the range of 31.2 ft. (9.5 m) or more
behind, and/or either left or right from the current position.
● If the parking space and the green frame do not match
If the lines of the parking space are wider than the green frame, position the frame so that the difference between the frame and the parking space lines is equal on both sides.
279
When driving
By touching the point you wish to move the frame to, you can move the
green frame.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Parallel parking assist mode
■ Screen description
Parallel parking assist mode assists the driver with parallel parking by
automatically controlling the steering wheel when backing up, in order to
park in the target position set on the screen.
If a message is displayed while maneuvering (P. 289)
Camera orientation confirmation lines
If the edge of the bumper displayed on the screen does not match the camera orientation confirmation lines, the camera may not be aligned correctly.
Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
Parallel parking assist mode button
280
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Parking operation
● Pre-support function
Pre-support is useful for parking between two vehicles that are parked
along the shoulder of the road. This function detects the empty parking
space between the parked vehicles and then guides the driver to the correct starting position for reversing. Chimes are used to inform the driver
when it is time to start reversing.
● Before backing up
2
When the pre-support function is in use
When driving
STEP 1
With the vehicle stopped or driving at 9 mph (15 km/h) or less, push the
pre-support switch once when your vehicle is positioned slightly before
the target parking space. (P. 269) Check that the screen changes.
281
2-4. Using other driving systems
STEP 2
Move your vehicle slowly alongside the vehicle parked in front of the target parking space. Your vehicle should move parallel to the road or
shoulder and be approximately 3 ft. (1 m) away from the side of the
parked vehicle.
To discontinue the guidance, push the pre-support switch twice to turn the
pre-support function off. (P. 269)
STEP 3
A chime will sound twice when the front edge of the vehicle parked in
front of the target parking space is visible right beside you. When this
chime sounds twice, stop your vehicle.
282
2-4. Using other driving systems
When the pre-support function is not in use
STEP 1
2
To facilitate the setting of the target parking position, the front side sensors
detect the vehicles parked in front of and behind the parking space and identify the target parking position.
STEP 2
Stop your vehicle in a position where you can see the front edge of the
leading parked vehicle right beside you, with the steering wheel straight.
If there is no leading parked vehicle, the system will display the target
parking position (green or red frame) in the position used last time the
parallel parking assist mode was activated.
283
When driving
Move your vehicle slowly to a position parallel to the road or shoulder
approximately 3 ft. (1 m) away from parked vehicles.
2-4. Using other driving systems
● While backing up
STEP 1
Place the shift lever in the “R” position.
Touch
on the screen (only when the pre-support function
is not in use).
STEP 2
Use the arrow to align the green frame with your target parking space,
and touch “OK”.
• You can also move the green frame by touching the screen (area other
than the arrows).
• There are tricks to align the green frame. (P. 286)
• If the frame is displayed in red, you cannot use the parallel parking assist
mode to park in that location. (P. 294)
• When the green frame is displayed, if you begin backing up without touching “OK”, the message “Parking position has not been set.” appears. If you
continue to back up, you will hear a warning tone and the system will be
disabled.
• If the frame is red, there will be no guidance even if you begin backing up.
• If the orientation of the frame is opposite to that of the target parking
space, touch
.
• There may be times when, due to image distortion, the green frame does
not match the parking space lines on the road surface. In this case, use the
warning flag and extended green line to set the target parking position.
• You may adjust the target parking position even after starting the parallel
parking assist mode.
284
2-4. Using other driving systems
STEP 3
If you touch “X”, assistance is canceled.
You can change the target parking position by touching
. If you are
backing up, or have already moved close to the target parking position,
will turn gray, and you will be unable to change the target.
Touch the arrows to move the target parking position, and then touch
“OK”.
You can only move the target parking position left or right, and the warning flag will not move even if you adjust the target parking position.
285
2
When driving
Position yourself as you would when backing up normally, and rest your
hands on the steering wheel without applying any pressure. Check your
surroundings and behind the vehicle for safety, and slowly back up, using
the brake pedal to control the vehicle's speed.
2-4. Using other driving systems
STEP 4
Once the vehicle is mostly within the target parking position, voice guidance will inform you to finish the assist mode.
For safety, voice guidance is given slightly before the target parking position.
Furthermore, at that point system control will finish, so grip the steering wheel
firmly, and finish parking in the desired position, using the brake to control the
vehicle's speed.
Check in front and behind the vehicle visually and check with the mirrors
while backing up.
■ Tips for setting the target parking position
Useful information for setting the target parking position (green frame)
● Aligning the green frame
There are two ways to align the green frame with the parking space,
either using the arrows on the screen, or by touching the screen at
points other than the arrows.
286
2-4. Using other driving systems
Using the arrows on the screen:
2
Adjusting the left-right alignment first will make subsequent alignment
easier.
Directly touching the target point:
By touching the point you wish to move the frame to, you can move the
green frame.
Touch the front edge of the place you wish to move.
If you touch the following areas, the green frame will not move:
• The area surrounding the arrows.
• The area near the lower button on the screen.
• Areas too far away to park in the range of 34.4 ft. (10.5 m) or more
behind the current position, and/or 16.4 ft. (5.0 m) or more either
left or right from the current position.
287
When driving
By touching the arrows displayed on the screen, you can move the
green frame.
2-4. Using other driving systems
● If there is a slope in the road
The assisted parking position will move left or right of the set target
parking position.
In this case, if you align the warning flag with the rear of the forward
parked vehicle, and the extended green line with the lower edge of the
parked vehicle's rear wheel when setting the target parking position,
the left side of your vehicle will be roughly in line with the left side of the
front parked vehicle once assisted parking is complete. If you are parallel parking on the opposite side of the road, left and right will be
reversed.
288
2-4. Using other driving systems
What to do when this sort of message is displayed
Cause
What to do
! Parking position
cannot be set.
Not in an area where system use is possible.
Change the vehicle's position,
referring to the help function.
! Check APGS.
Have your vehicle
checked by a
dealer.
There is a malfunction in
the system.
Have your vehicle checked by
your Lexus dealer.
! Use on flat
surface.
• The vehicle has rolled forward on a sloped road.
• The vehicle does not
move even if you take
your foot off the brake
pedal.
• You have depressed the
accelerator pedal during
the assist mode.
Do not attempt to use the system in those sorts of conditions. Use the system for flat
parking spaces.
If the message is displayed
only when the system is
operating, it is likely that
the tires are worn, or tire
inflation pressure is low.
Check tires for wear and pressure.
! System cannot
guide under
If the message is displayed
current conditions. constantly, there is most
likely a malfunction.
Turn the “POWER” switch to
OFF, then to ON mode. If the
message is still displayed, have
the vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer.
Do not attempt to use the sysThe vehicle has skidded or
tem on a slippery road such as
the tires have been locked.
snowy road.
289
2
When driving
Message
2-4. Using other driving systems
Message
Cause
What to do
Turn the “POWER” switch to
The system has temporarily
OFF, then to ON mode. Wait a
overheated.
few minutes before use.
! APGS not
available now.
There is a malfunction in
Have your vehicle checked by
the voice guidance system. your Lexus dealer.
The hybrid system has not
been started.
Turn the “POWER” switch to
ON mode and start the hybrid
system. If the message is still
displayed, have the vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer.
! Release parking
brake.
The parking brake has
been applied.
Release the parking brake.
! Too much force
applied to the
steering wheel.
You are exerting too much
Loosen your grip on the steerpressure on the steering
ing wheel.
wheel.
Steering position is
not straight. Turn
The steering wheel and
the steering wheel
tires are not straight.
to LEFT (or
RIGHT).
290
Turn the steering wheel until
tires are straight.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Message
Cause
What to do
! Parking position
has not been set.
You have begun to back up Stop the vehicle and touch
without touching “OK”.
“OK”.
! Speed is too fast.
Using the brake pedal, back
up at a speed that does not
The speed at which you are cause the warning chime to
sound. The system will be disbacking up is too fast.
abled if you back up too
quickly.
! Guidance
canceled by user
operation.
You have turned the steer- The system has been disabled.
ing wheel during the assist You will need to restart from
mode.
the beginning.
! Accelerator
pedal has been
depressed.
You have depressed the
accelerator pedal when
setting the target parking
position.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
291
2
When driving
Steer to left (or
right) until the
frame becomes
green.
Turn the steering wheel in the
direction indicated until the
frame turns green (the message “Too much force applied
to the steering wheel.” is displayed). Turn the wheel slightly
It is possible to begin to
park if you turn the steering more than necessary to overwheel in the direction indi- come tire resistance. Once
you have turned the
cated.
steering wheel, you can no
longer change the target parking position. Be sure to align
the frame before turning
the steering wheel.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Message
! Guidance
unavailable.
! System not ready.
! Depress the
brake pedal.
Cause
What to do
Some sort of malfunction
has occurred within the
system.
Have your vehicle checked by
your Lexus dealer.
“OK” is touched while the
brake hold system is on.
Take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
Depress the brake pedal and
touch “OK”.
Rinse with water and wipe with
a soft cloth. Wash with a mild
The sensors may be
cleanser and rinse if necessary.
affected by extreme cold
! Clean Park Sonar.
or covered by foreign mat- If the message is still displayed,
have your vehicle checked by
ter.
your Lexus dealer.
292
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Message and voice guidance
In the parking assist function, voice guidance accompanies the following messages displayed during parking position setting and steering
wheel control. (Voice guidance may not be given depending on the
reason the message was displayed.)
Voice Guidance (Warning tone)
Message
During
setting
During steering wheel control
2
! System cannot assist
under current conditions.
-
(Two beeps) The guidance has been
canceled.
! APGS not available now. (One chime)
(Two beeps) The guidance has been
canceled.
! Release parking brake.
(One chime)
(Two beeps) The guidance has been
canceled.
! Parking position has not
been set.
(One chime)
-
! Speed is too fast.
-
(Several beeps and then two beeps)
The guidance has been canceled.
! Guidance canceled by
user operation.
-
(Two beeps) The guidance has been
canceled.
For the adjustment of the volume, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”.
293
When driving
! Check APGS. Have your
(Two beeps) The guidance has been
vehicle checked by a
(One chime)
canceled.
dealer.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ When a red frame is displayed in the parking assist function
If the frame turns red and the message “Adjust the frame to the target.” is
displayed while setting the target parking position, you cannot use the
parking assist function.
In this situation, move the target parking position, or move the position of
the vehicle.
The frame may be displayed in red, depending on the location and angle
of the vehicle when “R” position is selected.
Furthermore, even if the frame is displayed in green, if you move the
frame to a location unsuitable for parking using the parking assist function, the frame will change to red.
● Help function
If you touch “OK”, the reason the frame is displayed in red will be displayed. Move the vehicle appropriately, referring to the screen.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Touch “OK”.
Move the vehicle in accordance with the message displayed.
See the following items for information on the messages displayed.If
you move the frame to a position acceptable to the assist mode, a chime
will sound.
STEP 3
STEP 4
294
If you have moved the vehicle forwards, place the shift lever in “R”
position.
Check that the frame is green, and if that position is acceptable,
touch “OK”.
2-4. Using other driving systems
● Displayed message and vehicle position for parking assist mode
Too far
If the vehicle is too far from the
parking space, the message “Start
from a position nearer to the target
parking area.” will be displayed.
2
If the orientation of the vehicle is
incorrect, the message “Start with
larger vehicle heading angle.” will
be displayed.
Near the front of the parking
space
Too close
If the vehicle is near the front of the
parking space, or too close, the
message “Start from a position
farther from the target parking
area.” will be displayed.
295
When driving
Angle too small
2-4. Using other driving systems
● Displayed message and vehicle position for parallel parking assist
mode
Too far
If the vehicle is too far from other
parked vehicles, the message
“Start from a position near to
adjacent vehicle.” will be displayed.
Too close
If the vehicle is too close to other
parked vehicles, the message
“Start from a position farther from
adjacent vehicle.” will be displayed.
Too far forward
If the vehicle is too far forward, the
message “Start after moving
slightly backward.” will be displayed.
Too far back
If the vehicle is too far back, the
message “Start after moving
slightly forward.” will be displayed.
296
2-4. Using other driving systems
Initializing the system
Make sure to initialize the system
in the following situations.
● The 12-volt battery is disconnected and reconnected.
The help screen appears when “?” is touched. Make a correction using
the following method in accordance with the display.
When the vehicle is stopped, turn the steering wheel all the way to the
left, then all the way to the right. (It does not matter in which direction 
right or left you turn first.)
When the screen returns to the original display, correction is complete.
If the above screen remains, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer.
297
2
When driving
● The system initialization in
progress screen is displayed
when the shift lever is moved to
“R” position (due to low battery
etc.).
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Disabling the system
Even if the shift lever is in “R” position, if you push any of the switches around the
screen, such as “SETUP” or “INFO/PHONE”, the screen will switch to that mode.
When in the parking assist mode or parallel parking assist mode, in the following
case the voice guidance will say “The guidance has been canceled.”, a message will
be displayed, and the system will be disabled. (P. 289)
After the following operations:
• Moving the steering wheel
• Using the accelerator
• Moving the shift lever out of “R” position
• Applying the parking brake
• Switching the screen display
In the following situations:
• If the vehicle slips forward or stops after taking your foot off the brake pedal
• If the backing speed is too fast
• If normal assistance cannot be rendered due to worn tires or low tire inflation
pressure
• If the target parking position has not been confirmed on the target parking position setting screen before backing up
• Any warnings displayed on the screen are not acknowledged before backing
up
• If there is a system malfunction
• If the system temperature protection function operates
• If a hands-free phone call is received
If the system is disabled while backing up, grip the steering wheel firmly and depress
the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a halt. The system has been completely disabled, so you may either start again from the beginning, or if you wish to finish parking manually, be sure to operate the steering wheel as you would normally.
298
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Notes for the pre-support function
299
2
When driving
• If the detected parking space is too small, guidance will not start.
• To allow the pre-support system to activate accurately, move the vehicle as
slowly as possible (at a speed that will allow the vehicle to stopped suddenly).
• The function cannot be used if the shift position is in “P” or “R” position, or if the
vehicle speed is greater than 9 mph (15 km/h).
• In order to identify parking spaces and detect parked vehicle using the sensors
on both sides of the front bumper, guidance cannot be given if a space is not
detected.
• Parking space guidance and searching continues until the vehicle speed is
greater than 9 mph (15 km/h) or until the function is turned off by pushing the
pre-support switch.
• Perpendicular parking: The pre-support function can be only used for perpendicular parking when a vehicle is parked beside the target parking space on the
side closest to your vehicle as it approaches.
Parallel parking: The pre-support function can be only used for parallel parking
when vehicles are parked both in front of and behind the target parking space.
■ Detecting white lines in parking assist mode (perpendicular parking)
If there are no vehicles parked on either side of the target parking space when your
vehicle stops, the approximate parking space location is identified, and the white
lines in that location are detected. For this reason, stopping in front of the parking
space will make the detection of target parking space's white lines easier.
Successful detection of the parking space's white lines may not be possible,
depending on the shape of the line.
In the following circumstances, detection of the parking space lines on the road surface may not be possible:
● The lines are faded or dirty, making them unclear.
● The road surface is of a light color which does not contrast well with the white
lines.
● The parking space lines are a color other than white (yellow etc.).
● The area is dark, for example at night or in a covered parking lot.
● During or after rain, when the road surface is wet and reflects light, or puddles
have formed.
● The sun is shining directly on the camera, for example early morning or late
afternoon.
● The parking space is covered with snow or de-icing agent.
● There are markings or maintenance marks on the road surface.
2-4. Using other driving systems
● The color or brightness of the road surface is not uniform.
● Hot or cold water has splashed on the camera, and the lens is fogged.
● There are dirt or water droplets on the lens.
■ Intuitive parking assist
When the Intuitive parking assist are turned on and an obstacle is detected in front
of or behind your vehicle, a warning appears on the top right of the screen.
(P. 250)
■ Area displayed on screen
The area covered by the camera is limited.
Objects which are close to either corner of
the bumper or under the bumper cannot be
seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to vehicle orientation or road
conditions.
Corners of bumper
300
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Advanced parking guidance system camera
In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly:
● The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at
night.
● The temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.
● Water droplets are on the camera lens
● Foreign matter, such as snow or mud,
adheres to the camera lens.
● The camera has scratches or dirt on it.
● The sun or headlights are shining
directly into the camera lens.
If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected
off the vehicle body, is picked up by the
camera, a smear effect* characteristic to
the camera may occur.
*: Smear effect  A phenomenon that
occurs when a bright light is picked up by
the camera; when transmitted by the
camera, the light source appears to have
a vertical streak above and below it.
If you install the antenna of a wireless device
close to the camera, the screen image may
be affected by the electromagnetic waves,
and the system may not function correctly.
Install an antenna away from the camera.
The method for adjusting the picture quality
of the advanced parking guidance system is
the same as that for the screen.
301
When driving
or humidity is high, such as when it
rains.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ When using the system
● Be sure to check that the vehicle can actually park in the target space before
beginning operation.
● Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers, amount
of luggage, etc.), the position of the green frame displayed on the screen may
change. Be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle before proceeding.
● Never depend on the system entirely when backing up. Always make sure your
intended path is clear.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
● When using the parking assist mode and parallel parking assist mode
• When backing up, be sure to check your surroundings and behind the vehicle
for safety, and back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle
speed.
• If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles, obstacles or people, depress the
brake pedal to stop the vehicle, and then disable the system by touching “X”
on the screen.
• If there is a problem, stop the vehicle and disable the system by touching “X”
on the screen.
• Keep clothing such as neckties, scarves and long sleeves away from the steering wheel, as they may become entangled. Also, keep children away from the
steering wheel.
• If you have long fingernails, be careful not to injure yourself when the steering
wheel moves.
302
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ How to use the camera
● Never back up while looking only at the screen. The image on the screen is differ-
303
2
When driving
ent from actual conditions. Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces
will differ from actual distances. If you back up while looking only at the screen,
you may hit a vehicle, a person or an object. When backing up, be sure to check
behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirrors before proceeding.
● If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may
change. Be sure to have the camera's position and mounting angle checked by
your Lexus dealer.
● If the camera is subjected to a collision, or the camera orientation confirmation
lines are not in line with the bumper, it is likely that the camera position or angle of
installation has become crooked. Contact your Lexus dealer.
● Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle's surroundings, as the displayed image
may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted, or not entirely
visible when the outside temperature is low. When backing up, be sure to check
behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirror before proceeding.
● Do not use the system when the trunk is not completely closed.
● If the image may be hard to see due to dirt, direct sunlight, shadow or snow on the
camera lens.
● If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If
the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse.
● If you scrape the camera cover, or scrub it with a hard brush or an abrasive agent,
you may scratch the cover, leading to poor picture quality.
● Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to
the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
● As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
● If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehi-
cle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
● When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, or mercury
lights, the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
● When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
■ Conditions which may affect the sensor
● Do not attach any accessories within the detection range of the sensors.
● A sensor may not operate properly in the following situations:
• There is ice, snow or mud on the sensor. (When it is removed, the normal
operation will return.)
• The sensor is frozen. (When the sensor warms up, it will return to normal.) At
low temperatures in particular, sensors that are frozen may not detect a
parked vehicle.
• When the vehicle is tilted.
• In extreme hot or cold weather.
• When driving on bumpy roads, slopes, gravelled roads or grass.
• Devices issuing ultrasonic waves are operated around your vehicle, such as a
horn from another vehicle, motorcycle engine, air braking sound from heavyduty vehicles.
• When rain or water is splashed over the vehicle.
• When a radio antenna or fender pole is mounted on your vehicle.
• The sensor approaches too close to a parked vehicle.
304
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Conditions which may affect the system
● If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehi-
305
2
When driving
cle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
● Do not use the system in the following conditions:
• Outside of parking areas
• In unprepared parking area such as gravel or sand
• On slippery or icy roads, or in snow
• When using tire chains or emergency tires.
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
• If the asphalt is melted due to harsh sunlight
• If there are a large number of vehicles or pedestrians passing
• In areas unsuitable for parking (overly small parking space, cliff etc.)
● Tire conditions
• The tires are extremely worn, or the tire inflation pressure is low
• Tires have received a strong impact, such as bumping against a curb, resulting
in improper wheel alignment
• Do not use tires other than those installed by the manufacturer, as the system
may not function correctly. Furthermore, if you change the tires, there may be
errors in the positions of the lines and frames displayed on the screen. If you
wish to change your tires, contact your Lexus dealer.
2-4. Using other driving systems
NOTICE
■ When using the parallel parking assist mode
● Be sure to stop the vehicle parallel to the road or shoulder. If the vehicle is not
parallel, the assist location will be very near the shoulder. If it looks like the vehicle
will hit or mount the shoulder, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle, and
touch “X” on the screen to deactivate the system.
● Always check that there are no obstacles in the green frame or between your
vehicle and the parking space, and that the warning flag and extended green line
do not overlap any parked vehicles or walls.
● If there are obstacles in the green frame or between your vehicle and the parking
space, or the warning flag or extended green line overlaps a parked vehicle or
wall, there is a danger of collision. In this case, do not use the parallel parking
assist mode. The same applies if the green frame overlaps the shoulder.
● The warning flag is only a guide. Be sure to directly check your surroundings and
behind the vehicle for safety, and back up carefully.
● If the road surface has level variations or a gradient between the starting position
and target parking position, it will not be possible to correctly set the location,
which may cause the parking position to be misaligned or crooked. In this case,
do not use the parallel parking assist mode.
● When the vehicle in front of the empty space is parked on the shoulder or is not
parallel with the road, parallel parking assist mode cannot be used.
● If the parked vehicle is narrow, or parked close to the shoulder, the assisted parking position may be quite close to the shoulder. If the vehicle seems likely to hit or
mount the shoulder, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle, and disable the
system by touching “X”.
306
2-4. Using other driving systems
NOTICE
■ When using the parking assist mode (perpendicular parking)
● Always check that there are no obstacles in the green frame or between your
307
2
When driving
vehicle and the parking space, and that the warning flag does not overlap any
parked vehicles or walls.
● If there are obstacles in the green frame or between your vehicle and the parking
space, or the warning flag overlaps a parked vehicle or wall, there is a danger of
collision. In this case, do not use the parking assist mode.
● The warning flag is only a guide. Be sure to directly check your surroundings and
behind the vehicle for safety, and back up carefully.
● If the road surface has level variations or a gradient between the starting position
and target parking position, it will not be possible to correctly set the location,
which may cause the parking position to be misaligned or crooked. In this case,
do not use the parking assist mode.
● If the red area which denotes an area unsuitable for parking overlaps with the
lines of the parking space, you will be unable to park, as the parking space is
judged as being an area unsuitable for parking. Progress to a position where the
parking space lines do not overlap with such an area.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
■ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents any of the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
■ Hill-start assist control
Prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when starting on an incline or
slippery slope
■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel
■ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering)
Adjusts the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and
steering wheel movement
■ Active stabilizer suspension system (if equipped)
Reduces sway when cornering according to steering wheel movement
and the selected suspension damping mode, in order to maintain a stable
vehicle posture
308
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start
assist control, EPS, and VGRS systems
Maintains vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by
controlling the brakes and hybrid system output, steering assist, and steering ratio
■ Pre-Collision System (if equipped)
P. 315
2
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backward when starting on an incline, or any of the
drive wheels spin, the indicator
flashes to indicate that the VSC/
TRAC/hill-start assist control systems have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
The stop lights and high mounted
stoplight turn on when the hill-start
assist control system is operating.
The slip indicator light flashes as
well when ABS is operating.
309
When driving
When the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating
2-4. Using other driving systems
Disabling TRAC and/or VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may
reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. You may need to
turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
● Turning off TRAC
Quickly press and release the
switch to turn off TRAC.
A message will be displayed on the
multi-information display showing
that TRAC has been disabled.
Press the switch again to turn the
system back on.
● Turning off TRAC and VSC
Press and hold the switch for more
than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped to turn off TRAC and
VSC.
The VSC off indicator light will
come on, and a message will be
displayed on the multi-information
display showing that TRAC has
been disabled.
Press the switch again to turn the
system back on.
310
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
311
2
When driving
Turning the “POWER” switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and VSC systems will
automatically re-enable them.
■ Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle
speed increases.
■ Automatic TRAC/VSC reactivation
If the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when
vehicle speed increases.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC, hill-start
assist control and VGRS systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the hybrid system is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
● The steering wheel may be moved slightly or a sound may be heard when the
hybrid system is started or stopped. None of these indicate that a malfunction
has occurred.
■ Hill-start assist control is operational when
● The shift lever is in the “D” or “S” position.
● The brake pedal is not depressed.
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Conditions affecting VGRS operations
In the following situations, the center position of the steering wheel may change.
However, the position will return to normal after the conditions are improved.
● When the steering wheel has been operated quickly or operated for an
extended period of time while the vehicle is stopped or is moving very slowly
● When the steering wheel has been held fully to the left or right
● When the 12-volt battery is low or the voltage temporarily drops
● After the hybrid system is started at lower than -22°F (-30°C)
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The
steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive
steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The system should
return to normal within 10 minutes.
■ If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC, TRAC and hill start assist control function.
(P. 505)
312
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on a wet or slick road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal condi-
313
2
When driving
tions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ If hill-start assist control does not operate effectively
Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control may not
operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■ When TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC
and VSC unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on
the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
314
2-4. Using other driving systems
Pre-Collision System
When the radar sensor detects possibility of a frontal collision, the pre-collision system such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged
to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage.
■ Pre-collision seat belts (front seats)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or loses
control of the vehicle. (P. 111)
2
When driving
However, the system will not operate in the event of skidding when the
VSC system is disabled.
■ Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
■ Pre-collision braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns the
driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system
determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically
applied to help reduce the collision speed. Pre-collision braking function
can be turned on and off using the pre-collision braking off switch.
(P. 316)
■ Suspension control
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the operation of suspension control helps prevent the front of the vehicle from dropping when
the brakes are applied suddenly.
: If equipped
315
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Driver monitor system (if equipped)
When the system determines that there is a possibility of a collision, and
that the driver is not facing forward, PCS warnings are given in advance to
warn the driver. If the situation does not improve, pre-collision alert braking will be applied. (P. 318)
■ Steering gear control (VGRS) (with driver monitor system)
When the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the steering
gear ratio is changed to help improve the response to steering input.
■ Pre-collision alert braking (with driver monitor system)
When the system determines that the driver is not facing forward, and that
the possibility of a collision persists, the brakes will be applied briefly to
give the driver a sensory warning and encourage them to take preventive
measures. Pre-collision alert braking can also be disabled using the precollision braking off switch.
Disabling pre-collision braking
Pre-collision braking and precollision alert braking (if
equipped) disabled
Pre-collision braking and precollision alert braking (if
equipped) enabled
The “PCS” warning light flashes
when pre-collision braking is disabled.
316
2-4. Using other driving systems
Radar sensor
Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and
determines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obstacles
Detect pedestrians and other
three-dimensional objects on or
near the road ahead together with
the radar sensor while the vehicle
is moving. When the headlights
are on, near-infrared rays are projected to ensure proper detection
performance in the night time.
Camera sensors
Near-infrared ray transmitters
317
When driving
Camera sensors (with driver monitor system)
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driver monitor sensor (with driver monitor system)
Detects the direction the driver is
facing. The system determines
whether the driver is facing forward.
■ Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the radar sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.
■ A camera sensor cannot detect obstacles in the following situations:
● A camera sensor is directly receiving intense light, such as sunlight.
● Visibility is poor because of bad weather or other reasons.
● The sensor temperature is extremely high.
■ The pre-collision system is operational when
● Pre-collision seat belts:
Operating conditions A
• Vehicle speed is above 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The relative speed difference between your vehicle and another vehicle that
is forward of your vehicle, or the speed at which your vehicle is approaching
an obstacle is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
Operating conditions B
• Vehicle speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
318
2-4. Using other driving systems
● Pre-collision brake assist:
319
2
When driving
• Vehicle speed is above 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The relative speed difference between your vehicle and another vehicle that
is forward of your vehicle, or the speed at which your vehicle is approaching
an obstacle is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
● Pre-collision braking:
• The pre-collision braking off switch is not pressed.
• Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The relative speed difference between your vehicle and another vehicle that
is forward of your vehicle, or the speed your vehicle is approaching an obstacle is greater than 13 mph (20 km/h).
● Suspension control:
• Vehicle speed is above 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The relative speed difference between your vehicle and another vehicle that
is forward of your vehicle, or the speed at which your vehicle is approaching
an obstacle is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h).
● Steering gear control (VGRS) (with driver monitor system):
• Vehicle speed is above 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The relative speed difference between your vehicle and another vehicle that
is forward of your vehicle, or the speed at which your vehicle is approaching
an obstacle is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h).
● Pre-collision alert braking (with driver monitor system):
• The pre-collision braking off switch is not pressed.
• The system determines that the driver is not facing forward.
• Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The relative speed difference between your vehicle and another vehicle that
is forward of your vehicle, or the speed at which your vehicle is approaching
an obstacle is greater than 13 mph (20 km/h).
• The steering is not being turned.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of collision
● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
● When driving over a narrow iron bridge
● When there is a metal object on the road surface
● When there is a metal plate in the road in front of the vehicle on a downhill slope
● When there is a metal object such as a sign board in front of the vehicle on an
uphill slope
● When driving on an uneven road surface
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
● When your vehicle is skidding with the VSC system off
● When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure
appears to be directly in the vehicle's line of travel.
● When climbing a steep hill causes an overhead billboard or other metallic structure to appear directly in the vehicle's line of travel.
● When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
● When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
● When passing through certain toll gates
When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten it.
■ Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly
The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
● On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
● On slippery roads such as those covered with ice or snow
● If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection
● If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
● When your vehicle is skidding with the VSC system off
● When only part of your vehicle’s front end collides with, or contacts, a vehicle or
object in a frontal collision
320
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
321
2
When driving
Warning light will flash and/or warning messages will turn on. (P. 504, 514)
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively:
● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille or surrounding area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille.
■ Handling the driver monitor sensor (with driver monitor system)
Observe the following to ensure the driver monitor sensor can function effectively.
Failure to do so may result in a malfunction or may prevent the system from correctly determining the direction the driver is facing.
● Do not disassemble, damage, lift or pull on the sensor.
● Do not touch the sensor while driving.
● Do not wet or spill water on the sensor.
● Do not drop anything on or allow anything to hit against the sensor. Do not subject the sensor to an impact.
● Make sure that there are no scratches, dirt or stickers on the side of the sensor
that faces the driver.
● Do not place any objects in front of the side of the sensor that faces the driver or
cover the sensor.
322
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the camera sensors (with driver monitor system)
323
2
When driving
Observe the following to ensure that the PCS functions correctly:
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
PCS effectiveness may be reduced due to the presence of raindrops, condensation, ice or snow on the windshield.
● Do not change the installation position of a camera sensor, or remove and reinstall it. The direction of a camera sensor is precisely adjusted.
● When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the upper
part of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on the images. In
such a case, use the windshield defogger to provide warm, dry air to the windshield.
● Do not place anything on the dashboard.
Images reflected on the windshield may reduce the effectiveness of a camera
sensor.
● Do not attach a sticker or other items to the windshield near a camera sensor.
■ Determining the direction the driver is facing (with driver monitor system)
The driver monitor function does not operate when the vehicle is stopped.
The direction the driver is facing may not be determined correctly if any of the following conditions exist:
● There is an object between the driver monitor sensor and the driver’s face, such
as when the sensor is blocked.
● A part of the driver’s face is covered.
● The sensor or the driver’s face is exposed to intense light such as sunlight.
● The driving posture is improper.
■ Headlights (with driver monitor system)
The near-infrared ray transmitter projects strong energy that is not visible. Although
the transmitter normally turns off when the vehicle is stopped, never look into the
headlights for your safety.
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system
By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT. There
are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep in mind
the following important points.
● Assisting the driver in watching the road
The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the
vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless
or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
● Assisting the driver in making correct judgment
When attempting to estimate the likelihood of a collision, the only data available
to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of
the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant
and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver in taking action
The pre-collision braking is designed to help reduce the severity of a collision,
and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision is unavoidable. This
system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the
vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a dangerous situation
the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to ensure the safety of
all involved.
324
2-4. Using other driving systems
NOTICE
■ Camera sensors (with driver monitor system)
325
2
When driving
Observe the following to ensure that the PCS functions correctly:
● Do not subject a camera sensor to a strong impact or force, and do not disassemble a camera sensor.
● Do not scratch camera lens, or let it get dirty.
■ Headlights (with driver monitor system)
Observe the following to ensure proper near-infrared ray projection:
● Keep the headlights clean at all times.
● The detection performance may deteriorate if the high beams are misaligned or
the high beams are inoperative.
■ Precautions for cleaning the driver monitor sensor (with driver monitor system)
● Gently wipe the sensor with a soft cloth to prevent damage.
● Wipe any excess dirt with a cloth dampened with neutral detergent, all liquids
having been wringed out of the cloth. After that, wipe again with a dry cloth.
● Do not use benzene, thinner, glass cleaners, wax, etc.
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load:
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure
all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650
lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
326
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailer towing.
Example based on your vehicle
2
When driving
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with a combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in
your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 825 lb. (375 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
825 lb. — 366 lb. = 459 lb. (375kg —166 kg = 209 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with a combined weight of 388 lb.
(176 kg) get in, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
459 lb. — 388 lb. = 71 lb. (209kg — 176 kg = 33 kg)
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the
increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an
increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load
capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
327
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may
get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being
depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers,
causing an accident.
• Driver’s feet
• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• Package tray
• Instrument panel
• Dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
328
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
■ Total load capacity:
5-seat models
825 lb (375 kg)
4-seat models
660 lb (300 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage.
When driving
■ Seating capacity:
5-seat models
5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
4-seat models
4 occupants (Front 2, Rear 2)
2
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■ Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 465)
329
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
330
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine/power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the rear tires.
2
When driving
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that
may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
331
2-5. Driving information
■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to
road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to “P” without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.
Selecting snow chains
Use the correct snow chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain
size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
(0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter)
Cross chain
(0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter)
Regulations on the use of snow chains
● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
● Install the chains on the rear tires.
● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
332
2-5. Driving information
■ Snow chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on front tires.
● Install the tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
instructions.
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with snow chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle
handling.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
333
When driving
CAUTION
2
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs and obtain replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire air pressure sensor.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire air pressure sensor may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.
334
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also
does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch
carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed
for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
2
When driving
335
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
336
Interior features
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen........................... 338
Set up screen........................... 339
Information screen ............... 340
3-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front air conditioning
system ...................................... 341
Rear air conditioning
system ..................................... 355
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers .............................. 363
Windshield wiper de-icer .... 364
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list..................... 365
• Interior lights ........................ 366
• Personal lights...................... 367
3-4. Using the storage
features
List of storage features......... 369
• Glove box ............................... 371
• Coin holder ........................... 372
• Door pockets........................ 372
• Cup holders .......................... 373
• Console box.......................... 374
• Non smokers boxes............ 376
• Auxiliary boxes .................... 377
3
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors ................................. 380
Vanity mirrors .......................... 381
Outside temperature
display..................................... 382
Ashtrays.................................... 383
Cigarette lighters.................. 384
Power outlets .......................... 386
Heated steering wheel ........ 389
Climate control
seats/seat heaters................ 391
Armrest .................................... 395
Retractable table................... 396
Rear sunshade ........................ 398
Rear door sunshades ............. 401
Coat hooks .............................. 404
Floor mat .................................. 405
Trunk features......................... 406
Garage door opener ............ 408
Safety Connect ....................... 414
337
3-1. Using the touch screen
Touch screen
By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the audio system
and air conditioning system, and adjust the screen display, etc.
Button
338
Page
“CLIMATE”
P. 341
“AUDIO”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“SETUP”
P. 339/
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“DISP”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“MAP/VOICE”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“DEST”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“INFO/PHONE”
P. 340/
Navigation System Owner's Manual
3-1. Using the touch screen
Set up screen
You can change the touch screen to your desired settings.
Press “SETUP” to display the “Setup” screen.
3
Page
“General”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“Clock”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“Voice”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“Navi.”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“Phone”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“Audio”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“Vehicle”
P. 255/
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“Other”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
339
Interior features
Switch
3-1. Using the touch screen
Information screen
“Information” screen can be used to display the fuel consumption information or operate the hands-free system.
Press “INFO/PHONE” to display the “Information” screen.
Switch
340
Page
“Phone”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“Fuel Consumption”
P. 41
“MAP Data”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“Calendar”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“LEXUS Insider”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“XM Sports”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“XM Stocks”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
“XM Nav WeatherTM”
Navigation System Owner's Manual
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front air conditioning system
Air flow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Press “CLIMATE” to display the air conditioning operation screen.
Without rear air conditioning system
Air conditioning operation
screen display button
Air conditioning
on/off switch
Fan speed display
Air flow display
3
Interior features
Driver’s side
temperature
control
Passenger's
side temperature
control
Dual operation button
Automatic mode
Driver’s side temperature
display
Off
Windshield defogger
Outside air or
recirculated air mode
Passenger’s side
temperature display
Micro dust and pollen filter
341
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
With rear air conditioning system
Fan speed display
Air conditioning operation
screen display button
Rear air conditioning operation screen display switch
Air flow display
Air purifier and rear air conditioning
operation switch
Air conditioning
on/off switch
Driver's side
temperature control
4-zone operation button
Automatic mode
Driver’s side
temperature display
342
Off
Windshield
defogger
Passenger’s side
temperature control
Outside air or recirculated air mode
Passenger’s side
temperature
display
Micro dust and pollen filter
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the voice command system
The voice command system is used to turn the air conditioning system on
and off and to change temperature settings.
Pull
to operate the voice
command system. (“Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”)
3
Using the automatic mode
Press “AUTO”.
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
STEP 2
Press
to switch to automatic air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between
outside air and recirculated air modes.
STEP 3
Press “” on “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” to increase the
temperature and “” to decrease the temperature.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately. (without rear air conditioning system)
Air outlets and fan speed for the right-hand and left-hand seats may be
set separately depending on the temperature setting. (with rear air conditioning system)
343
Interior features
STEP 1
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Without rear air conditioning system
Press “” on “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultaneous
modes each time “DUAL” is pressed.
Dual mode (the indicator on “DUAL” is on): The temperature for the
left-hand seat and right-hand seat can be adjusted separately. Operating the passenger's side temperature control will enter dual mode.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on “DUAL” is off): Only “” and “”
on “TEMP” (driver’s side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all
seats.
With rear air conditioning system
Press “” on “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time “4-ZONE” is pressed.
Individual mode (the indicator on “4-ZONE” is on): The temperature
for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (P. 355) can be
adjusted separately. Operating the passenger's side temperature control will enter individual mode.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on “4-ZONE” is off): Only “” and
“” on “TEMP” (driver’s side) can be used to adjust the temperature
for all seats.
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Touch any switch of
increase) on the operation screen.
Press
344
to turn the fan off.
(decrease 
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Changing the air outlets
Without rear air conditioning system
Touch any mode on the operation
screen.
With rear air conditioning system
Touch any mode on the operation
screen.
Different air outlets for the lefthand and right-hand front seats can
be chosen.
345
Interior features
L: Left-hand front seat
R: Right-hand front seat
3
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.
Upper body
Upper body and feet
Feet
Feet and windshield
346
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches between
(recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO”
and
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the
button is pressed.
When the air intake control system is switched to automatic mode, it operates automatically.
Turning the air purifier off (with rear air conditioning system)
Touch “Air Purifier” on the operation screen.
The air purifier will turn off when the indicator on the switch goes off. Air will
not flow from the roof vents.
Operating the rear air conditioning system on the operation screen
(with rear air conditioning system)
■ Using the automatic mode
STEP 1 Touch
on the operation screen.
STEP 2
Touch “REAR AUTO”.
The air conditioning system and air purifier will operate, and
air outlets and fan speed will be set automatically.
STEP 3
Touch “” on “TEMP” to increase the temperature and “” to
decrease the temperature.
Air outlets and fan speed for the right-hand and left-hand seats may be
set separately depending on the temperature setting.
347
Interior features
To turn the air purifier on, touch “Air Purifier” again.
3
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
STEP 1 Touch
on the operation screen.
Touch “” (increase) or “”
STEP 2
(decrease) on the operation
screen. Operating the switch will
enter individual mode.
L: Left-hand rear seat
R: Right-hand rear seat
The air conditioning system
switches between individual and
simultaneous modes each time “4ZONE” is pressed.
■ Adjusting the fan speed (air purifier and cooler from the roof vents)
STEP 1 Touch
on the operation screen.
STEP 2 Touch any switch of
(decrease  increase) on
the operation screen.
According to the air outlets currently selected, the fan speed of either
the cool air from the roof vents or air purifier will be adjusted.
(P. 358)
Touch
on the operation screen to turn the fan off.
Defogging the windshield
Press
.
The air conditioning system operates automatically.
348
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press
.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the
air flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn off
automatically after approximately 1
to 3 minutes.
To stop the operation, press
again.
3
Interior features
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
 “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
349
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear center outlets (without rear console display)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
350
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear center outlets (with rear console display)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Rear side outlets
Roof side outlets (with rear air conditioning system)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
351
3
Interior features
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize
fuel efficiency:
● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling
capacity
● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
● Adjust the fan speed
● Turn off Eco drive mode
■ Customization
The air conditioning control of Eco drive mode can be changed to the same setting
as that used in normal drive mode. (Customizable features P. 573)
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur:
● Immediately after “AUTO” is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to in
accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
■ Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to
(outside air) mode in situations where the windows need to be defogged.
352
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ When the hybrid battery cooling system operates
● If the hybrid battery cooling system operates when the air conditioning is off, a
353
3
Interior features
message will be shown on the multi-information display and the air conditioning
will automatically turn on. (P. 211)
● The sound of the air flow may change when cool air flows from the rear roof
vents or the air purifier is in operation. This occurs when the hybrid battery is
being cooled and does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the air conditioning is off, and the fan is operating, turning the “AUTO” mode
on will activate the air conditioning system.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold,
the following may occur:
• Outside air mode does not switch to
.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
.
■ Air purifier (with rear air conditioning system)
The air purifier will turn on when turning the rear air conditioning system on.
■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difDo not use
ference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.
354
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear air conditioning system
Air flow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
5-seat models
Off
Automatic mode
Left side temperature display
Left side air flow display
Air volume display
Right side air flow display
Right side temperature display
Air volume
Changes the left side air outlet used
Interior features
Left side
temperature control
3
Right side
temperature control
Changes the right side air outlet used
: If equipped
355
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
4-seat models
Automatic mode
Off
Changes the
left side air
outlets used
Changes the
right side air
outlets used
Air volume
Left side
temperature
control
Right side
temperature
control
Left side temperature display
Left side air flow display
Right side temperature display
Air volume display
Right side air flow display
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1
Press “AUTO”.
The air conditioning system and air purifier will operate, and
air outlets and fan speed will be set automatically.
“AUTO” will be displayed on the control panel.
STEP 2
Press “” on “TEMP” to increase the temperature and “” to
decrease the temperature.
Air outlets and fan speed for the right-hand and left-hand seats may be
set separately depending on the temperature setting.
356
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “” on “TEMP” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease
the temperature.
Air outlets and fan speed for the right-hand and left-hand seats may be
set separately depending on the temperature setting.
■ Changing the air outlets
Press
.
The air outlets change as follows each time
is pressed.
3
Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.
Upper body
When the indicator on “A/C” (on
the front operation screen) is on
*: Cool air only
Upper body
When the indicator on “A/C” (on
the front operation screen) is off
357
Interior features
Different air outlets for the right-hand and left-hand rear seats can be chosen.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Upper body and feet
Feet
■ Adjusting the air volume
The volume of cool air or air from the air purifier can be adjusted
according to the mode selected.
Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on
.
Cool air flows from roof vents.
358
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air purifier operation (air flows
from the rear package tray.)
Press “OFF” to turn the fan off.
Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets
Rear center outlets (with rear console display)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
359
3
Interior features
Rear center outlets (without rear console display)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Roof side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
360
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Button lock function
5-seat models
To prevent inadvertent operation, the buttons
on the rear armrest can be locked. Press
“MODE” until you hear a beep to lock the
buttons. Pressing “MODE” again until you
hear a beep will release the lock.
The indicator appears on the display when
the buttons are locked.
4-seat models
The indicator appears on the display when
the buttons are locked.
361
3
Interior features
To prevent inadvertent operation, the buttons
on the rear armrest can be locked. Press
“MODE” until you hear a beep to lock the
buttons. Pressing “MODE” again until you
hear a beep will release the lock.
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Rear control panel illumination off function
5-seat models
Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. Press “2” until you hear
a beep to turn the illumination off. Pressing
“2” again until you hear a beep will turn the
illumination on.
4-seat models
Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. Press “2” until you hear
a beep to turn the illumination off. Pressing
“2” again until you hear a beep will turn the
illumination on.
■ Replacing the rear air conditioning filter
Replacing the air conditioning filter when using rear air conditioning or air purifier
reduces air flow or deodorizing performance. (P. 471).
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.
362
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
On/off
Press
to turn on the rear
window and outside rear view
mirror defoggers. The defoggers will automatically turn off
after 15 minutes. The operation
time changes according to the
ambient temperature and vehicle speed. Pressing the button
again also turns the defoggers
off.
3
Interior features
■ The defogger can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can become very
hot and burn you.
363
3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Windshield wiper de-icer
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press “CLIMATE” to display the
air conditioning operation
screen.
Touch
to turn on the
windshield wiper de-icer. The
windshield wiper de-icer will
automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
Touching the switch again also
turns the de-icer off.
■ The windshield wiper de-icer can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
CAUTION
■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
: If equipped
364
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the
following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of
the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the
doors are opened/closed, and the “POWER” switch mode.
3
Interior features
Front personal lights (P. 367)
Shift lever lighting (when the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY
or ON mode)
Front interior lights (P. 366)
Inside door handle lighting
Rear personal lights (P. 367)
Rear interior light (P. 366)
Door courtesy lighting
365
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights
Footwell lighting
Seat belt buckle lighting
“POWER” switch lighting
Outer foot lights
Interior lights
Front
“OFF”
Door position on/off
“ON”
Rear
On/off
If door position on is selected for
the front interior light, the rear interior light is also turned on/off by the
opening and closing of a door.
366
3-3. Using the interior lights
Personal lights
Personal lights
Front
On/off
Rear (without rear seat entertainment system)
On/off
3
Interior features
Rear (with rear seat entertainment system)
On/off
Press the knob to release it, and
turn the knob to the desired
brightness.
Darker
Brighter
367
3-3. Using the interior lights
Personal lights
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged
If the interior lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the front interior
light switch (door position on/off) is on, the lights will go off automatically after 20
minutes.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 573)
368
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features
5-seat models
3
Interior features
Glove box
Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)
Non smokers boxes (if equipped)
Door pockets
Cup holders
Console box
Coin holder
369
3-4. Using the storage features
4-seat models
Glove box
Auxiliary boxes
Non smokers boxes (if equipped)
Door pockets
Cup holders
Console box
Coin holder
370
3-4. Using the storage features
Glove box
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
Glove box
3
■ Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. ( P. 76)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
371
Interior features
Open (push button)
Lock with the mechanical key
Unlock with the mechanical key
3-4. Using the storage features
Coin holder and door pockets
Coin holder
Press in the button.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the coin holder closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Door pockets (front)
The front door pockets can be
opened and closed.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the door pockets closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
372
3-4. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Cup holders
Front
Press down and release the right
side of the cup holder lid.
Rear (5-seat models)
3
Rear (4-seat models)
Press in and release the lid.
373
Interior features
Press in and release the cup
holder.
3-4. Using the storage features
Cup holders and console box
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Console box
Without rear console display
Slide the armrest while pressing
the button.
Lift the armrest.
With rear console display
Press the button.
Lift the armrest.
374
3-4. Using the storage features
Console box
■ Tray in the console box (without rear console display)
The tray can be raised backward.
■ Opening and closing assist function (without rear console display)
When the console box is opened or closed partway, this function will apply force in
the appropriate direction, helping open or close the console box.
3
CAUTION
Interior features
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■ Tray
Do not insert items exceeding the height of the tray. Doing so may prevent opening
and closing of the lid.
375
3-4. Using the storage features
Non smokers boxes
Non smokers boxes (if equipped)
Front
Press in the lid.
Rear
Open the lid.
■ Removing the non smokers box (front)
Holding the left edge of the non smokers box,
pull upward.
376
3-4. Using the storage features
Non smokers boxes and auxiliary boxes
CAUTION
■ Using the non smokers box
Do not use the non smokers boxes as an ashtray.
■ Caution while driving
Keep the non smokers boxes closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Auxiliary boxes
Overhead
Press in the button.
3
Rear console (with rear console display)
Press in the lid.
377
Interior features
This box is useful for temporarily
storing sunglasses and similar small
items.
3-4. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
Rear seat (5-seat models)
STEP 1 Pull down the armrest. (P. 395)
Press the button.
STEP 2
Lift the lid.
The lid cannot be lifted while it is
slid back. (P. 395)
Rear seat (4-seat models  seatback)
Press in the lid.
This box is useful for storing DVD
discs and headphones.
Rear seat (4-seat models  armrest)
Pull up the lever to release the lock
and lift the lid.
378
3-4. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
■ Tray in the rear console
The tray can be removed.
CAUTION
3
■ Caution while driving
379
Interior features
Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or sudden
stop.
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and swing
to the side.
Side extender:
Place in side position, then
slide backward.
380
3-5. Other interior features
Vanity mirrors
Front
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
Rear
Press the button to open.
3
The vanity light turns on.
Interior features
NOTICE
■ When not in use
Keep the rear vanity mirror closed.
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the hybrid system is off.
381
3-5. Other interior features
Outside temperature display
The displayed temperature ranges from -40°F (-40°C) up to 122°F
(50°C) when the “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ When “” or “E” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■ Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
382
3-5. Other interior features
Ashtrays
Front
Push the front part of the lid to
open. Push the lid again to close.
To remove, pull the ashtray
upwards.
Rear
Open the ashtray lid.
To remove, pull the ashtray
upwards.
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking sudden swerving or an accident.
■ To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
: If equipped
383
3-5. Other interior features
Cigarette lighters
Front
Push the front part of the lid to
open, and push the cigarette
lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
Rear (5-seat models without rear console display)
Push the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter will pop out
when it is ready for use.
Rear (4-seat models)
Open the auxiliary box and
push the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter will pop out
when it is ready for use.
■ The cigarette lighter can be used when
The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
: If equipped
384
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ To avoid burns or fires
● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
3
Interior features
385
3-5. Other interior features
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for the following components:
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A
115 VAC: Accessories that use less than 100 W
■ 12 V
Front
Rear (5-seat models without rear console display)*
Rear (5-seat models with rear console display)*
386
3-5. Other interior features
Rear (4-seat models)*
■ 115 VAC
Without rear console display*
3
Interior features
With rear console display*
*: If equipped
387
3-5. Other interior features
■ The power outlet can be used when
12 V
The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
115 VAC
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
12 V
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
115 VAC
Do not use a 115 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 115 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection
circuit will cut the power supply.
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
■ Appliances that may not operate properly (115 VAC)
The following 115 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W:
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process precise data
● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
388
3-5. Other interior features
Heated steering wheel
The heated steering wheel can be used to heat the leather portion of the
steering wheel.
On/off
The indicator light comes on
when the heater is operating.
3
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Timer
The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
■ If the indicator light flashes
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the button
again. If the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occurring. Turn the
heated steering wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
389
Interior features
■ Operating condition
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ Burns
Only appropriately qualified and capable non-impaired persons should operate the
vehicle. However, care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following
categories comes into contact with the steering wheel when the heated steering
wheel is on:
● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold
remedies, etc.)
NOTICE
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged
Turn the switch off when the hybrid system is off.
390
3-5. Other interior features
Climate control seats/seat heaters
The temperature of the seats can be adjusted individually.
■ Front climate control seats
Press the knob to release it,
and turn the knob to the
desired temperature setting.
Off
Ventilation
Cool air
Warm the seat
Press the knob to lock it when
not in use.
3
Interior features
391
3-5. Other interior features
■ Rear climate control seats (if equipped)
5-seat models
STEP 1 Slide the armrest lid. (P. 395)
Press the knob to turn the
STEP 2
system on, and turn the knob
to the desired temperature
setting.
Press the knob again to turn the
system off.
Ventilation
Cool air
Warm the seat
4-seat models
Press the knob to turn the
system on, and turn the knob
to the desired temperature
setting.
Press the knob again to turn the
system off.
Ventilation
Cool air
Warm the seat
The rear climate control seats
can also be turned on and off
from the front seats.
392
3-5. Other interior features
■ Rear seat heaters (if equipped)
STEP 1 Slide the armrest lid. (P. 395)
Press the knob to turn the sysSTEP 2
tem on, and turn the knob to the
desired temperature setting.
The further you turn the knob
clockwise, the warmer the seat
temperature becomes. Press
the knob again to turn the system off.
■ Operating condition
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Replacing the air filters
Filters are installed in the climate control seats. For replacement of the filters, contact your Lexus dealer.
393
3
Interior features
The rear seat heaters can also
be turned on and off from the
front seats.
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ Burns/excessive cooling
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat to avoid the possibility of
burns or excessive cooling:
• Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons and persons with a physical disability
• Persons who have sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep, such as sleeping drugs and cold remedies
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the climate control seat or seat
heater. Using the climate control seat or seat heater with a blanket or cushion
may increase or decrease the temperature of the seat, resulting in overheating or
overcooling.
● Do not use the climate control seat or seat heater more than necessary. Doing so
may cool the occupants excessively or may cause minor burns or overheating.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the climate control seat and seat heater
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects, such as needles and nails, into the seat.
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged
Do not leave the system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
394
3-5. Other interior features
Armrest (5-seat models)
Pull the armrest down for use.
■ When operating the switches in the armrest
Press the button to release the lock, and slide
the lid back.
3
Interior features
Press the button again for returning the lid.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
395
3-5. Other interior features
Retractable table (4-seat models)
STEP 1
Slide the lever to raise the table.
STEP 2
Pull the table up and pull down
the table.
The position of the table can be
changed. Before using the table,
make sure that the table is
securely locked.
When the table is in use, the
front seats will stop if they are
going to contact the table.
(P. 85, 103)
When returning the table, pull it
up while pulling the lock release
lever.
396
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When not in use
To avoid injury, return the table.
■ Caution while driving
Keep the table stowed properly in its place. In the event of an accident, contact with
the table may result in death or serious injury.
■ When using the table
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.
● Make sure the table is securely locked.
● Do not lean on the table.
● Do not put anything heavier than 22 lb. (10 kg) on the table.
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the table
Do not place too much strain on the table.
397
3-5. Other interior features
Rear sunshade
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating any of the buttons shown below.
From front seat (without rear console display)
Extend/retract
From front seat (with rear console display)
Extend/retract
From rear seat (5-seat models)
STEP 1 Slide the armrest lid. (P. 395)
Extend/retract
STEP 2
398
3-5. Other interior features
From rear seat (4-seat models)
Extend/retract
3
■ The rear sunshade can be used when
399
Interior features
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■ Operating the rear sunshade after turning the hybrid system off
The rear sunshade can be operated for approximately 60 seconds even after the
“POWER” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF.
■ Reverse operation feature
To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade automatically lowers when the
shift lever is shifted to “R”.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
● The button is pressed again.
● The shift lever is shifted to “P”.
● The shift lever is shifted out of “P” or “R”, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9
mph (15 km/h).
If the hybrid system is off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the
reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the hybrid system is
turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the
sunshade again, press the button.
■ Button lock function
To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 361)
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered
Do not place fingers or any objects in the shade mechanism or in the opening as
injury may result.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged
Do not operate the rear sunshade when the hybrid system is off.
■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.
● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.
400
3-5. Other interior features
Rear door sunshades
The rear door sunshades can be extended and retracted by operating any
of the buttons shown below.
From front seat (without rear console display)
Extend/retract
The rear door sunshades can be
extended only when both of left
and right rear door sunshades
are retracted. Pressing the button with either side retracted will
cause both sides to be retracted.
3
Interior features
From front seat (with rear console display)
Extend/retract
The rear door sunshades can be
extended only when both of left
and right rear door sunshades
are retracted. Pressing the button with either side retracted will
cause both sides to be retracted.
From rear seat (5-seat models)
STEP 1 Slide the armrest lid. (P. 395)
Extend/retract
STEP 2
: If equipped
401
3-5. Other interior features
From rear seat (4-seat models)
Extend/retract
■ Operating conditions
● The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
● The rear windows are fully closed.
The rear door sunshades automatically retract when the rear windows are
opened.
■ Operating the rear door sunshades after turning the hybrid system off
The rear door sunshades can be operated for approximately 60 seconds even after
the “POWER” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between a rear door sunshade and the window frame,
the jam protection function will cause the sunshade to detach from its drive mechanism and retract.
If the jam protection function operates when extending the rear door sunshades
Pressing the button will reconnect the sunshade.
Pressing the button again will allow the sunshades to be operated.
If the sunshade does not operate after the button is pressed, press the button again.
If the jam protection function operates when retracting the rear door sunshades
Press and hold the button to re-extend the rear door sunshades, and continue
pressing for more than 5 seconds after the sunshades have fully extended and
stopped.
402
3-5. Other interior features
■ Button lock function
To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 361)
■ When reconnecting the 12-volt battery
The rear door sunshades will always be retracted the first time the button is pressed.
CAUTION
■ When the rear door sunshades are being extended or retracted
NOTICE
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged
Do not operate the rear door sunshades when the hybrid system is off.
■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshades
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
● Do not attach items to the rear door sunshades.
● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
● Do not operate the rear door sunshades continuously for long periods of time.
403
3
Interior features
Do not place fingers or any objects in the shade mechanism or in the opening as
injury may result.
■ Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
3-5. Other interior features
Coat hooks
Without rear air conditioning system
To use the coat hook, push it on.
With rear air conditioning system
To use the coat hook, push it on.
CAUTION
■ Items that must not be hung on the hook
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death
or serious injury.
404
3-5. Other interior features
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using
the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
The shape of the retaining hooks
(clips) and the fixing procedure
of the floor mat for your vehicle
may differ from those shown in
the illustration. For details, refer
to the floor mat retention clip
installation instructions supplied
with the clips.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the
pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■ When installing the driver's floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the correct place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the
floor.
● With the hybrid system stopped and the
shift lever in “P”, fully depress each pedal to
the floor to make sure it does not interfere
with the floor mat.
405
Interior features
CAUTION
3
3-5. Other interior features
Trunk features
■ Cargo net
The cargo net is provided for
securing loose items on the
floor or items inside the trunk.
Raise the cargo hooks on the
floor. Hook the net on the cargo
hooks.
■ Shopping bag hooks
406
3-5. Other interior features
■ First-aid kit storage belt
Loosen
Tighten
3
CAUTION
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks on the floor to their stowed positions.
407
Interior features
■ When the cargo net is not in use
3-5. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and
other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink.
Programming HomeLink
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator
Buttons
■ Programming HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners)
Point the remote control transmitSTEP 1
ter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink buttons.
Keep the HomeLink indicator
light in view while programming.
408
3-5. Other interior features
STEP 2
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink buttons and the transmitter button. When the
HomeLink
indicator
light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink indicator light
comes on but does not flash,
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink button”
instructions. (P. 411)
Test the HomeLink operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink button. The remote control transmitter
is of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is of
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
STEP 4
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
409
Interior features
STEP 3
3
3-5. Other interior features
■ Programming a rolling code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is rolling code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
STEP 1
Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
motor for the location of the learn button.
STEP 2
Press the learn button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.
STEP 3
Press and hold the vehicle's programmed HomeLink button for
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
STEP 4
Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
410
Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.
3-5. Other interior features
Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
STEP 5
■ Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink button” instructions.
Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light should come on.
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a
signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still pressing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on the
transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash.
411
Interior features
Operating HomeLink
3
3-5. Other interior features
Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from
the HomeLinkbutton.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: CB2070NHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
412
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control devices
The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink compatible transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
3
Interior features
413
3-5. Other interior features
Safety Connect
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per
day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics
hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions,
as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such
then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
■ System components
Microphone
LED light indicators
“SOS” button
: If equipped
414
3-5. Other interior features
■ Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers. (P. 417)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 418)
● Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 418)
3
Interior features
● Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 418)
■ Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or
push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription
details.
415
3-5. Other interior features
■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible dur-
ing Safety Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center
or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription
Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available;
charges vary by subscription term selected.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle
Location will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in
Canada, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States
(except Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada.
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
416
3-5. Other interior features
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode, the red indicator
light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the
system is designed to automatically call the response center. The
responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak
with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the
occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats
the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services
provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent
to the location.
417
Interior features
Safety Connect services
3
3-5. Other interior features
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities
to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a
police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle.
Further information is available at Lexus.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch
the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such
as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Enhanced
Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the
Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at
Lexus.com.
418
3-5. Other interior features
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
3
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers,
and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the
ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
419
Interior features
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986]
3-5. Other interior features
■ License
Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following
United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations:
4,901,307 5,490,165 5,056,109 5,504,773 5,101,501
5,506,865 5,109,390 5,511,073 5,228,054 5,535,239
5,267,261 5,544,196 5,267,262 5,568,483 5,337,338
5,600,754 5,414,796 5,657,420 5,416,797 5,659,569
5,710,784 5,778,338
■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
420
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............. 422
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.............. 425
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions........................... 434
Hood.......................................... 437
Positioning a floor jack ......... 438
4-2. Maintenance
Engine compartment ........... 440
Maintenance
requirements ........................ 428
12-volt battery ........................ 452
General maintenance ......... 430
Tire inflation pressure........... 465
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs................................. 433
Wheels...................................... 469
Tires............................................ 456
Air conditioning filter ............. 471
Electronic key battery........... 474
Checking and replacing
fuses ......................................... 476
Headlight aim ......................... 482
Light bulbs................................ 484
421
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the
windows.
● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
422
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving
for long distance in the hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■ When cleaning the windshield
Off
● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the
raindrop sensor
■ Caution about the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers to become quite
hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes and diffusers until they
have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers
can cause burns.
423
4
Maintenance and care
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers
may operate unexpectedly in the following
situations, and may result in hands being
caught or other serious injuries and cause
damage to the wiper blades.
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (alu-
minum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with
low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ When using an automatic car wash
Set the wiper switch to off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may
be damaged.
424
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep
it in top condition:
■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
425
Maintenance and care
■ Synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
4
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent
results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) air vents, or in the trunk.
Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 142)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
426
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-
427
4
Maintenance and care
rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline
or acidic solutions, dye, or bleach
• Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior
part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces.
● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also
cause the body to rust.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to
the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes
running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance:
■ General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This
can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled
Maintenance”.
■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s
Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”
or “Warranty Booklet”.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
428
4-2. Maintenance
■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
STEP 1 Switch the display to the trip meter “A” when the hybrid system is operating. (P. 202)
STEP 2 Turn the “POWER” switch OFF.
STEP 3 While pressing the trip meter reset button, turn the “POWER” switch to
ON mode (but do not start the hybrid system because otherwise the
reset mode will be canceled). Press and hold the button until the multiinformation display indicates that the reset is complete.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been
performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
■ Warning in handling of 12-volt battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after
handling. (P. 454)
429
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
4
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items
Check points
Brake fluid
At the correct level? (P. 450)
Coolant
At the correct level? (P. 447)
Engine oil
At the correct level? (P. 443)
Exhaust system
No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 449)
Washer fluid
At the correct level?
(P. 451)
Luggage compartment
Items
12-volt battery
430
Check points
Check the connections. (P. 452)
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
Check points
Accelerator pedal
• Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Transmission “Park” mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
“P”?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance
and correct amount of free play?
Brakes
• No pull to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
• Move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
(P. 482)
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate
smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
Maintenance and care
Head restraints
4
431
4-2. Maintenance
Items
Steering wheel
Check points
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Doors/trunk
• Operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks
• Is there any leakage after parking?
Tires
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■ If the hybrid system is operating
Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.
432
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations
● When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
4
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
433
Maintenance and care
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections.
Items
434
Parts and tools
12-volt battery condition (P. 452)
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level
(P. 450)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
Engine/power control unit coolant
level
(P. 447)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Parts and tools
Engine oil level
(P. 443)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)
Fuses
(P. 476)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Tire inflation pressure
(P. 465)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Headlight aim
(P. 482)
• Phillips-head screwdriver
(P. 484)
• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench
Light bulbs
Washer fluid
(P. 451)
Maintenance and care
Radiator and condenser (P. 449)
4

• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water
or washer fluid)
435
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury,
observe the following precautions:
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Make sure that the indicator on the “POWER” switch and the “READY” indicator
are both off.
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold,
etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine
compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flammable.
■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Be sure the “POWER” switch is OFF.
With the “POWER” switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.
(P. 449)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in your eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to
dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
436
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
4
Lift the auxiliary catch lever and
lift the hood.
CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
437
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■ Front
■ Rear
438
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious
injury:
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the
439
4
Maintenance and care
jack.
● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by
the floor jack.
● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
● Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in “P”.
● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
● Be sure to turn off the height control and stop the hybrid system. Otherwise, the
vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function. (P. 265)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
Power control unit coolant
reservoir
(P. 447)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 443)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 443)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 450)
Fuse boxes
(P. 476)
440
Washer fluid tank (P. 451)
Power control unit coolant
radiator
(P. 449)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser
(P. 449)
Engine coolant radiator
(P. 449)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 447)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment covers
■ Removing the engine compartment covers
Outside
Front
4
Maintenance and care
■ Installing the clips
Type A
441
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type B
NOTICE
■ After installing an engine compartment cover
Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.
442
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for
the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull
STEP 2
the dipstick out.
4
STEP 3
STEP 5
STEP 6
443
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the
engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Engine oil selection
Oil quantity
(Low  Full)
Item
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
444
P. 549
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Clean funnel
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of
the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds, frequent
acceleration and deceleration.
● A new engine consumes more oil.
● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may
have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles (0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles, 1.0 L/1000
km)
● If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600 miles
(1000 km), contact your Lexus dealer.
4
Maintenance and care
445
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
446
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.
Engine coolant reservoir
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (P. 539)
4
Maintenance and care
447
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Power control unit coolant reservoir
Reservoir cap
“F”
“L”
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(P. 541)
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiators, hoses, coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water
pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling systems.
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
448
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When the hybrid system is hot
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding the coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
4
Radiator and condenser
CAUTION
■ The radiators and condenser may be hot after driving
Do not touch the radiators or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.
449
Maintenance and care
Check the radiators and condenser, and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type
Item
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
450
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
4
■ When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating, as the
washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
451
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
12-volt battery
■ Location
The 12-volt battery is located in
the left-hand side of the luggage
compartment.
■ Removing the 12-volt battery cover
Remove the 12-volt battery
cover after removing the clip.
■ Exterior
Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and
that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
452
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Installing the 12-volt battery cover
Install the 12-volt battery cover
with the clip. Press down on the
cover at position “A” to secure it.
■ Before recharging
453
4
Maintenance and care
When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery
In some cases, the hybrid system may not start. Follow one or both of the following
procedures:
● After opening and closing the driver’s door, wait 10 seconds then attempt to
start the hybrid system. (If the system does not start first time, repeat the procedure.)
● With the shift lever in “P” and the “POWER” switch OFF, open and close any
door, then attempt to start the hybrid system.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at both methods, contact
your Lexus dealer.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or
serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the 12-volt battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
454
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When replacing the 12-volt battery
Use a 12-volt battery designed for the LS600hL. Failure to do so may cause gas
(hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.
For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the 12-volt battery
Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be
sure all accessories are turned off.
4
Maintenance and care
455
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.
■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or
“” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
inflation pressure if not rotated.
■ Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire
pressure warning system after
tire rotation.
■ Tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 508, 514)
456
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 459)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
● When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire
inflation pressures.
● When changing the tire size
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
457
4
Maintenance and care
● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling
speed.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
STEP 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “POWER” switch
OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
STEP 2
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 556)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
STEP 3
STEP 4
Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode.
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times and a message
appears on the multi-information
display.
The switch is under the driver's side
instrument panel, facing the floor
above the accelerator pedal.
STEP 5
458
Wait a few minutes for the multi-information display to show the
tire inflation pressures (5 tires), and then turn the “POWER”
switch OFF.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique
ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it
is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
459
4
Maintenance and care
Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the
fabric or bulges indicating internal damage.
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage.
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they
have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(P. 562)
■ Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 331)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to
the specified level.
460
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level
and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
4
Maintenance and care
461
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
TPMS Transmitter FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
TPMS Receiver FCC ID: HYQ13BCX
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
462
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Tire pressure warning system operation
463
4
Maintenance and care
The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a tire
bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause
damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics,
which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters
and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 457)
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
464
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 556)
4
Maintenance and care
465
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust tire pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
466
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures
that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the
tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
CAUTION
4
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
467
Maintenance and care
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as
soon as possible.
468
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.
■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in
the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 457)
469
4
Maintenance and care
■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.
470
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
■ Front air conditioning filter
STEP 1 Set the air conditioning system to recirculated air mode.
(P. 347)
The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in
outside air mode.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Turn the “POWER” switch OFF.
Open the glove box. Lift and
remove the partition.
4
Remove the filter cover.
STEP 5
Remove the filter case.
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
471
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 6
Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
The “UP” marks shown on the
filter and the filter case should
be pointing up.
Reset the air conditioning filter maintenance data. (P. 473)
■ Rear air conditioning filter (if equipped)
STEP 1 Turn the “POWER” switch OFF.
Open the trunk lid. Remove the
STEP 2
filter cover.
STEP 7
STEP 3
Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new
one.
The “UP” mark shown on the
filter should be pointing up.
472
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Replacement interval for the front air conditioning filter
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
473
4
Maintenance and care
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter when a message appears on the
multi-information display. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early
replacement may be required.
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
■ After changing the front air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following
procedures:
STEP 1 Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode.
STEP 2 Press and hold
(on the air conditioning panel) for 4 seconds or
more.
A buzzer will sound to indicate that the maintenance data has been successfully
reset.
■ Rear air conditioning filter (if equipped)
If it is necessary to clean or replace the filter, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Climate control seat filter
Filters are installed in the seats. When it is necessary to clean or replace the filters,
contact your Lexus dealer.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR1632)
■ Replacing the battery
STEP 1
Take out the mechanical key.
STEP 2
Remove the cover.
STEP 3
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
474
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
● The operational range is reduced.
■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer
can replace the battery for you.
4
CAUTION
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can
cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
475
Maintenance and care
■ Removed battery and other parts
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the “POWER” switch OFF.
STEP 2 Remove the engine compartment cover (P. 441) and the 12volt battery cover (P. 452).
STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
STEP 1
Engine compartment (type B fuse box)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
476
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment (type C fuse box)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
Engine compartment (fuse box near the power control unit)
There are high voltage parts and
wiring near the fuse box. For
inspection and replacement of
the fuses, contact your Lexus
dealer.
4
Maintenance and care
Driver's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
477
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Passenger's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Trunk (type A fuse box)
Remove the lid.
Trunk (type B fuse box)
Remove the cover.
478
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Trunk (type C fuse box)
Remove the terminal cover.
STEP 4
Take out the pullout tool.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout tool.
4
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
479
Maintenance and care
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
STEP 5
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
480
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 484)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
481
4
Maintenance and care
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
■ Fuse box near the power control unit
Never check or replace the fuses as there are high voltage parts and wiring near
the fuse box.
Doing so may cause electric shock, resulting in death or serious injury.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Headlight aim
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
P. 441
■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
■ Before checking the headlight aim
STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat.
STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times.
482
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adjusting the headlight aim
STEP 1
Turn bolt A in either direction
using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns.
STEP 2
Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as step 1 using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
483
4
Maintenance and care
If the headlight cannot be
adjusted using this procedure,
take the vehicle to your Lexus
dealer to adjust the headlight
aim.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement
seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus
dealer.
■ Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 558)
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
P. 441
■ Front bulb locations
Front turn signal light
Front fog light
484
Headlight high beam and
daytime running lights
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear bulb locations
Back-up light
Rear turn signal light
4
■ Headlight high beams
STEP 1 Before replacing the bulbs:
Left side
Remove the securing bolt and
move the washer fluid filler opening.
485
Maintenance and care
Replacing light bulbs
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Right side
Remove the securing bolts and
move the ECU.
Remove the relay block cover.
Remove the securing bolts and
nut, and move the relay block.
STEP 2
Turn the cover counterclockwise
and remove it.
STEP 3
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
486
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 4
Unplug the connector while pulling the lock release.
■ Front fog lights
STEP 1
To allow enough working clearance, turn the steering wheel to
the opposite side of the bulb to be
replaced.
Remove the fender liner bolt and
clips, and then remove the fender
liner.
4
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
487
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 3
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
STEP 4
Install the bolt and clips.
488
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Front turn signal lights
STEP 1
To allow enough working clearance, turn the steering wheel to
the opposite side of the bulb to be
replaced.
Remove the fender liner bolt and
clips, and then remove the fender
liner.
4
STEP 2
Disconnect the connector and
turn the bulb socket counterclockwise.
489
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
Turn the back cover counterclockwise.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 4
Remove the light bulb.
■ Back-up lights
STEP 1
Open the trunk lid and remove the
cover.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
490
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear turn signal lights
STEP 1
Open the trunk lid and remove the
cover.
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
4
Remove the light bulb.
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
491
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Lights other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your
Lexus dealer.
● Headlight low beams
● Parking lights
● Side turn signal lights
● Side marker lights
● Stop/tail lights
● High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ LED light bulbs
The headlight low beams, parking lights, side turn signal lights, side marker lights,
stop/tail lights, high mounted stoplight and license plate lights consist of a number
of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have
the light replaced.
492
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning
off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
4
Maintenance and care
493
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
494
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers............... 496
If your vehicle needs to
be towed................................. 497
If you think something
is wrong ................................. 503
5
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... ................................. 504
If a warning message is
displayed................................. 514
If you have a flat tire................. 517
If the hybrid system will
not start.................................. 526
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P”.................... 528
If the parking brake
cannot be released............. 529
If the electronic key
does not operate
properly .................................. 531
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged ............................ 535
If your vehicle overheats ..... 539
If the vehicle becomes
stuck........................................ 543
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency............................ 544
495
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an
accident.
Press the switch to flash all the
turn signal lights. To turn them
off, press the switch once again.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is not operating.
496
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a
flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
If the vehicle is damaged, use a towing dolly or flatbed truck.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
● The hybrid system is operating, but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
Towing eyelet
497
5
When trouble arises
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet(s). This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short
distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
5-1. Essential information
■ Before emergency towing
● Release the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to “N”.
● Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY (hybrid system off) or ON mode
(hybrid system operating).
CAUTION
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the
surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
● If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and the transfer
Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels in contact with the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission and the transfer.
498
5-1. Essential information
Installing towing eyelets
STEP 1
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 2
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
STEP 3
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench.
5
When trouble arises
■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 517
499
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This may
lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
Towing with a sling-type truck
NOTICE
■ To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
500
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
5
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and the transfer
Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels in contact with the ground.
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
● Do not tow the vehicle with the “POWER” switch OFF.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle
could be damaged while being towed.
501
When trouble arises
NOTICE
5-1. Essential information
Using a flatbed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flatbed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
502
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal. (P. 202)
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
● Appreciable loss of power
5
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
503
When trouble arises
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or
flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
(Canada) • Malfunction in the electronically controlled brake system
(U.S.A.)
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph (5
km/h) or more.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
504
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
(U.S.A.)
• The hybrid system;
• The electronic engine control system;
(Canada)
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic transmission control system
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The seat belt pretensioner system; or
• The active head restraints system
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
(Canada) • The brake assist system
(U.S.A.)
5
When trouble arises
Brake system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The regenerative brake system;
• The electronically controlled brake system; or
• The electric parking brake
Electric power steering system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system
505
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
(Flashes)
Warning light/Details
Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system is not malfunctioning:
• The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.
(P. 315)
• The light will turn on when the pre-collision braking is disabled. (P. 316)
• The light will turn on when the system cannot temporarily
be used. (P. 515)
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system;
• The TRAC system; or
• The hill-start assist control system
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
506
Cruise control indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system
“AFS OFF” indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the adaptive front lighting system
Automatic High Beam indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic high beam system.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
■ Electric power steering system warning light
When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily
drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on.
CAUTION
■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and
operate it using more force than usual.
5
When trouble arises
507
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Warning light
In the fuel
gauge
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates remaining fuel is
approximately 3.4 gal. (13 L,
2.8 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt
Fasten the seat belt.
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Fasten the seat belt.
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his/her seat belt
508
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
such as
• Natural causes (P. 510)
• Flat tire (P. 517)
Adjust the tire inflation pressure (including the spare tire)
to the specified level.
The light will turn off after a
few minutes. In case the light
does not turn off even if the
tire inflation pressure is
adjusted, have the system
checked by your Lexus
dealer.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Have the system checked by
Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer.
sure warning system
(P. 511)
High coolant temperature
warning light
P. 539
Indicates high engine coolant
temperature
When trouble arises
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on or
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
5
P. 514
509
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is not
fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
*2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sound to alert the driver and
front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone
for 20 more seconds.
■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in
the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare
tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
510
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
511
5
When trouble arises
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby
● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or
wheel housings
● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
● If tire chains are used
● If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception
● If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the
trunk
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer.
■ Customization
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 573)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
512
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat,
change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus
dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could
lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
5
When trouble arises
513
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions,
incorrectly performed operations, or shows messages that indicate a need
for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.
Master warning light
The master warning light comes
on or flashes when a message is
being shown on the multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning messages is shown again after its correction procedure has been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
514
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Messages and warnings
The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on
the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
System
warning
light
Comes on

Flashes
Flashes
Comes on
or flashes



Warning
Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such
as when a system related to driving is
malfunctioning or that danger may
result if the correction procedure is
not performed
Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such
as when the system shown on the
multi-information display may be
malfunctioning
Sounds
Indicates a situation, such as when
damage to the vehicle or danger may
result
Does not
sound
Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electrical components,
their condition, or indicates the need
for maintenance
Does not
sound
Indicates a situation, such as when an
operation has been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to perform an
operation correctly
*: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information
display.
515
5
When trouble arises
Comes on

Warning
buzzer*
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ System warning lights
The master warning light does not come on or flash in the following cases. Instead, a
separate system warning light will come on or flash along with the message shown
on the multi-information display.
● Malfunction of the AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)
The “AFS OFF” indicator light flashes. (P. 218)
● Malfunction of the brake system
The brake system warning light (red indicator) comes on. (P. 504)
● Malfunction of the regenerative brake system, electronically controlled brake
system or electric parking brake
The brake system warning light (yellow indicator) comes on. (P. 505)
● Malfunction of the ABS
The ABS warning light comes on. (P. 505)
● Malfunction of the charging system
The charging system warning light comes on. (P. 504)
● High engine coolant temperature
The high coolant temperature warning light comes on or flashes. (P. 508)
■ If “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown
P. 541
516
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided.
■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to “P”.
● Stop the hybrid system.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack handle
Parking brake release tool
Wheel nut wrench
Penlight batteries
5
Jack
When trouble arises
Towing eyelet
Penlight
Spare tire
Tools
517
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Penlight
The vehicle is equipped with a penlight, located inside the trunk. The penlight is provided in case it is necessary to perform an unexpected service
operation at night, such as installation of the spare tire.
Turn the top portion to remove
it.
Insert batteries.
Install the top portion.
On/off
Taking out the jack and spare tire
STEP 1
Lift up the hook of the panel on the
trunk floor.
STEP 2
Secure the panel using the hook
provided.
518
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
Remove the tool tray.
STEP 4
Remove the jack after removing
the hook.
STEP 5
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
519
5
When trouble arises
If the center fastener cannot be
turned by hand, use the wrench
that is stored in the trunk. (To
secure the tire, tighten the center
fastener by hand. Do not use the
wrench or other tools.)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Lefthand side
Front
Righthand side
Lefthand side
Rear
Righthand side
STEP 2
STEP 3
520
Wheel chock
positions
Behind the
rear righthand side tire
Behind the
rear lefthand side tire
In front of the
front righthand side tire
In front of the
front lefthand side tire
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
STEP 5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the spare tire
STEP 1
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
521
When trouble arises
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 2
Washer
Wheel nut
Disc wheel
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
Turn the lug nuts until the washers
come into contact with the wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
STEP 3
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
STEP 4
Tightening torque:
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
STEP 5
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
■ After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 457)
522
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle
suddenly falling off the jack.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the
jack.
● Do not start or run the hybrid system while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
● Be sure to turn off the height control and stop the hybrid system.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.
5
When trouble arises
523
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the
vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes
will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts
while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
● Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while
the vehicle is moving.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading
to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m,
14.3 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt
holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
524
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■ When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat hook hooked on the edge of the trunk.
The luggage mat may get damaged.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 457)
5
When trouble arises
525
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the hybrid system will not start
Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation.
Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:
■ The hybrid system will not start, even though the correct starting
procedure is being followed. (P. 184)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (P. 531)
● There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (P. 133)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
● The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical
problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However,
depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid system. (P. 527)
■ The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not
sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 535)
● The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■ The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does
not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 535)
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
526
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function
When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the “POWER” switch is
functioning normally:
Set the parking brake.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to “P”.
STEP 3 Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
STEP 4 Press and hold the “POWER” switch about 15 seconds while
depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
5
When trouble arises
527
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental
operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
528
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the parking brake cannot be released
In the event that the 12-volt battery is discharged or switch operation does
not release the parking brake, the parking brake can be released manually
using the procedure below. This procedure should be performed only if
necessary, such as in an emergency.
If the switch cannot be operated even when the 12-volt battery is normal,
the parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Before releasing the parking brake manually
● Shift the shift lever to “P”.
● Turn the “POWER” switch OFF.
● Check that the parking brake indicator is off.
● Chock the tires.
Releasing the parking brake manually
STEP 1
Take out the parking brake release
tool and the screwdriver from the
trunk. (P. 517)
STEP 2
Take out the spare tire. (P. 518)
529
When trouble arises
Install the parking brake release
tool into the screwdriver handle.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
STEP 4
Remove the plug.
Insert the tool and press it down
firmly while turning it counterclockwise until it stops.
■ Manual operation of the parking brake
The parking brake cannot be set manually.
CAUTION
■ When releasing the parking brake manually
● Shift the shift lever to “P”, turn the “POWER” switch OFF and chock the tires.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move, resulting in an accident.
● Turn the “POWER” switch OFF and check that the parking brake indicator is off.
Failure to do so may cause the system to operate and turn the parking brake
release tool that is inserted, resulting in an injury.
530
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 59) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened or the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure
below.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions
Use the mechanical key built in to the electronic keys to operate the
doors. (P. 50)
Doors
STEP 1
Remove the cover on the driver’s
door handle.
5
Locks all doors
Closes the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver's door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
Opens the windows and moon
roof (turn and hold)
531
When trouble arises
STEP 2
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3
After the operation is completed,
reinstall the cover.
Hook the upper claw of the cover
onto the upper catch on the vehicle side, and then push on the
lower side of the cover.
Make sure that the lower claw of
the cover is securely fastened to
the lower catch on the vehicle side.
If the cover is not securely
attached, it may fall off while driving.
Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.
532
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Changing “POWER” switch modes and starting the hybrid system
STEP 1
STEP 2
Ensure that the shift lever is in “P” and apply the brakes.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“POWER” switch.
If any of the doors is opened or
closed after the key was touched to
the switch to start the vehicle, an
alarm will sound to indicate that the
start function cannot detect the
key.
533
5
When trouble arises
To change “POWER” switch modes: Within 10 seconds of the
buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the
“POWER” switch. Modes can be changed each time the switch is
pressed. (P. 185)
To start the hybrid system: Press the “POWER” switch within 10
seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal
depressed.
In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be operated, contact your
Lexus dealer.
STEP 3
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Stopping the hybrid system
Shift the shift lever to “P” and press the “POWER” switch as you normally do when
stopping the hybrid system.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 474)
534
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the 12-volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the vehicle’s 12-volt battery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps
below.
STEP 1
Open the trunk lid and remove the 12-volt battery cover.
(P. 452)
In the event that the trunk opener cannot be used, use the mechanical key to open the trunk. (P. 531)
STEP 2
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
5
535
When trouble arises
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on your vehicle
STEP 3 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.
STEP 4 Open and close any of the doors with the “POWER” switch
OFF.
STEP 5 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the
“POWER” switch to ON mode, then start the hybrid system.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator
does not comes on, contact your Lexus dealer.
STEP 7 Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables
in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
STEP 6
■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged
The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.
■ Avoiding a discharged 12-volt battery
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged
The hybrid system may not start. (P. 453)
■ Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain
electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery
recharges automatically while the hybrid system is operating.)
■ If the 12-volt battery is discharged
The information stored in the computer will be deleted.
If the 12-volt battery is discharged, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
536
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions
537
5
When trouble arises
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is
not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to
come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as
brackets or unpainted metal.
● Do not allow the “+” and “-” clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12volt battery.
■ 12-volt battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions
when handling the 12-volt battery:
● When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the
vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.
■ After recharging the 12-volt battery
Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to
emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.
■ When replacing the 12-volt battery
P. 455
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans or belt
when connecting or disconnecting the cables.
538
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:
● The high coolant temperature warning light comes on or flashes:
The engine may be overheating.
● “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display:
The power control unit may be overheating.
Follow the correction procedure as described below.
Correction procedures
539
5
When trouble arises
■ If the high coolant temperature warning light comes on or flashes
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning
system.
STEP 2 Check to see if steam is coming out from the engine area.
If you see steam:
Stop the hybrid system. Carefully lift the hood after the steam
subsides and then restart the hybrid system.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.
STEP 3 Check if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the high coolant temperature warning light goes off
and then stop the hybrid system.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your local Lexus
dealer.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4
After the hybrid system has cooled
down, check the engine coolant
level and inspect the cooling system for leaks.
If the engine compartment cover
needs to be removed: P. 441
STEP 5
Add engine coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (P. 551)
540
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning
system.
STEP 2 Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.
STEP 3 Check if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until “Hybrid System Overheat” disappears and then stop
the hybrid system.
If the message does not disappear, call your Lexus dealer.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your local Lexus
dealer.
After the hybrid system has cooled
STEP 4
down, check the power control
unit coolant level and inspect the
cooling system for leaks.
If the engine compartment cover
needs to be removed: P. 441
Add power control unit coolant if
necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if power control unit coolant
is unavailable. (P. 551)
Have the vehicle inspected at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
541
When trouble arises
STEP 5
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Overheating
The following symptoms may occur when your vehicle is overheating:
● Hybrid system output decreases.
● Steam is coming from the engine area.
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious
injury such as burns.
● With a hybrid vehicle, there are times when the gasoline engine automatically
starts to run or the cooling fans suddenly start to operate. Do not touch or
approach the rotating parts of the belt or fans. Doing so may lead to fingers,
clothes or tools getting caught, resulting in an accidental injury.
● Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the hybrid system and radiator are
hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine/power control unit coolant
Wait until the hybrid system has cooled down before adding engine/power control
unit coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too
quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.
542
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to “P”.
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the hybrid system.
Shift the shift lever to the “D” or “R” position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC/VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts
to free the vehicle. ( P. 310)
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels.
● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require
towing to be freed.
543
5
When trouble arises
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may
also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle
in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
STEP 1
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
STEP 2
Shift the shift lever to “N”.
If the shift lever is shifted to “N”
STEP 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
STEP 4 Stop the hybrid system.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to “N”
STEP 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
Stop the hybrid system by pressSTEP 4
ing and holding the “POWER”
switch for 3 consecutive seconds or more.
Press and hold for 3 seconds or more
STEP 5
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
CAUTION
■ If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the hybrid system.
544
Vehicle specifications
6
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 546
Fuel information..................... 559
Tire information...................... 562
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ........ 573
545
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length
203.9 in. (5180 mm)
Overall width
73.8 in. (1875 mm)
Overall height *1
58.3 in. (1480 mm)
Wheelbase
121.7 in. (3090 mm)
Front
63.6 in. (1615 mm)*2
63.4 in. (1610 mm)*3
Rear
63.6 in. (1615 mm)*2
63.4 in. (1610 mm)*3
Tread
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
*1: Unladen vehicles
*2: Vehicles with 18-inch tires
*3: Vehicles with 19-inch tires
*4: 5-seat models
*5: 4-seat models
546
825 lb. (375 kg)*4
660 lb. (300 kg)*5
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used
in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine
compartment.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
6
Vehicle specifications
547
6-1. Specifications
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown.
Engine
Model
2UR-FSE
Type
8-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.70 3.52 in.
(94.0  89.5 mm)
Displacement
303.2 cu.in.
(4969 cm3)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
Premium unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
22.2 gal. (84 L, 18.4 Imp. gal.)
548
6-1. Specifications
Electric motor (Traction motor)
Type
Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output
165 kW
Maximum torque
221.3 ft•lbf (300 N•m, 30.6 kgf•m)
Hybrid battery (Traction battery)
Type
Nickel-Metal hydride battery
Voltage
14.4 V/module
Capacity
6.5 Ah (3HR)
Quantity
20 modules
Overall voltage
288 V
Lubrication system
Oil capacity (Drain and
refill  reference*)
with filter
9.5 qt. (9.0 L, 7.9 Imp. qt.)
without filter
8.9 qt. (8.4 L, 7.4 Imp. qt.)
549
6
Vehicle specifications
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5
minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
6-1. Specifications
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil
may be used. However, SAE 0W20 is the best choice for good fuel
economy, and good starting in
cold weather.
Outside temperature
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
550
6-1. Specifications
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
Cooling system
Capacity
Gasoline engine
Power control unit
Coolant type
11.7 qt. (11.1 L, 9.8 Imp. qt.)
2.7 qt. (2.6L, 2.3 Imp. qt.)
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
6
Vehicle specifications
551
6-1. Specifications
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO FK20HBR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust spark plug gap.
Electrical system
12-volt battery
Open voltage* at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all the lights are turned off)
Charging rates
5 A max.
552
6-1. Specifications
Transmission
Fluid capacity
5.8 qt. (5.5 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.)
The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Transfer
Oil capacity
0.74 qt. (0.7 L, 0.62 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
Toyota Genuine Transfer gear oil LL 80 (preferred),
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LX
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with Toyota genuine gear oil at the factory. Use Lexus
approved Toyota genuine gear oil or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy
the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
6
Vehicle specifications
553
6-1. Specifications
Front differential
Oil capacity
0.79 qt. (0.75 L, 0.66 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the
factory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an
equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact
your Lexus dealer for further details.
Rear differential
Oil capacity
1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LX
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the
factory. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an
equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact
your Lexus dealer for further details.
554
6-1. Specifications
Brakes
Pedal clearance *
3.7 in. (95.0 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04  0.08 in. (1.0  2.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining
wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 50 lbf (200 N, 20
kgf)
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
6
Vehicle specifications
555
6-1. Specifications
Tires and wheels
18-inch tires (type A)
Tire size
235/50R18 97W
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160 km/h]) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
18  7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
18-inch tires (type B)
Tire size
P235/50R18 97V
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160 km/h]) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 6 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
18  7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
556
6-1. Specifications
19-inch tires (type A)
Tire size
245/45R19 98Y
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160 km/h]) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 11 psi (70 kPa, 0.7 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires, 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the rear
tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
19  8J
Wheel nut torque
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
19-inch tires (type B)
P245/45R19 98V
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold
tire inflation pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160 km/h]) (in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 6 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold
tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
19  8J
Wheel nut torque
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
557
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire size
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
Headlights (high beam)
9005
60
A
Front turn signal lights

21
B
9006
51
C
Trunk lid light
194
3.8
D
Trunk light

3.8
E
7440
21
E
Back-up lights
921
16
E
Outer foot lights

5
E
Vanity lights
Front
Rear


8
3
E
D
Interior lights
Front
Rear


8
8
E
D
Rear personal lights (with rear seat
entertainment system)

10
F
Door courtesy lights

5
E
Front fog lights
Exterior
Rear turn signal lights
Interior
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
558
HB3 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
HB4 halogen bulbs
Double end bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Single end bulbs
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91
octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking and
significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine
damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded
gasoline.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
559
6
Vehicle specifications
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating
or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is
expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
customer satisfaction through better performance.
6-1. Specifications
■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep
clean intake systems.
■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing a maxiDO NOT use gasoline containmum of 10% ethanol.
ing more than 10% ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled
E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only
some examples of fuel containing more
than 10% ethanol).
● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower
than 87.
● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
560
6-1. Specifications
■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated
here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
6
Vehicle specifications
561
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Tire size
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Location of treadwear indicators
Tire ply composition and materials
(P. 564)
(P. 563)
(P. 456)
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is
a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
562
(P. 460)
(P. 556)
6-1. Specifications
Summer tires or all season tires
(P. 460)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*:The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
6
Vehicle specifications
563
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
564
6-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
565
6
Vehicle specifications
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
6-1. Specifications
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
566
6-1. Specifications
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated
and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
567
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
Vehicle maximum load on
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
the tire
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
568
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
569
Vehicle specifications
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
6
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
570
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
on at least one sidewall
Test rim
)
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
571
6
Vehicle specifications
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
*:Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
11 through 15
16 through 20
572
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus
dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Settings that can be customized at a dealer
The following table includes some settings that can be customized using
the navigation system display. (P. 579)
Item
Function
Smart access system
Smart access
with push-button start
system with
push-button
start
Door unlock function
(P. 54)
Customized
setting
On
Off
All the doors
Driver’s door
Each door
Same side doors
Wireless remote control
On
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
Off
6
All doors unlocked
in one step
573
Vehicle specifications
Wireless
remote control
(P. 67)
Default setting
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Off
Wireless
remote control
(P. 67)
Time elapsed before
automatic lock function
is activated if door is
not opened after being
unlocked
Door lock
(P. 70,
531)
574
30 seconds
120 seconds
Operational signal
(Emergency flashers)
Trunk unlocking operation
Smart access
system with
push-button
start and
wireless
remote control (P. 54,
67)
60 seconds
On
Push and hold
Off
Push twice
One short push
Alarm (panic mode)
On
Off
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On
Off
Open door warning
buzzer
On
Off
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
Off
On
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors.
Off
On
Shifting the shift lever
to “P” unlocks all doors.
On
Off
6-2. Customization
Item
Door lock
(P. 70,
531)
Trunk
(P. 75)
Power easy
access system
(P. 98)
Power windows
(P. 121)
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Shifting the shift lever
to position other than
“P” locks all doors.
On
Off
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors unlocked
in one step
On
Off
Unlocking using a
mechanical key
Power trunk opener
and closer function
Driver’s seat movement when exiting the
vehicle
Off
Full
Steering wheel auto
away and return function
On
Off
One-touch close operation using the power
window switches on
the front passenger
door and each rear
door
On
Off
Partial
6
Vehicle specifications
575
6-2. Customization
Item
Power windows
(P. 121)
Moon roof
(P. 124)
576
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
One-touch front passenger window or rear
window close operation using the power
window switch on the
driver’s door
On
Off
Off
Mechanical key linked
operation
Open and close
Wireless remote control linked operation
Off
On
Linked entry function
On
Off
Open only
Close only
Off
Mechanical key linked
operation
Open and close
Linked operation of
components when
mechanical key is used
Slide only
Tilt only
Wireless remote control linked operation
Off
On
Linked operation of
components when
wireless remote control is used
Slide only
Tilt only
Linked entry function
On
Off
Open only
Close only
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Off
Turn signal
lever
(P. 195)
Times of flashing of the
lane change signal
flashers
5
3
7
9
11
Light sensor sensitivity
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 216)
Air conditioning system
(P. 341)
-2 to 2
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically turn off after
doors are closed
30 seconds
Automatic high beam
system
On
Off
Switching between
outside air and recirculated air mode linked to
“AUTO” switch operation
Auto
Manual
A/C auto switch operation
Auto
Manual
Standard
-3 to 3
Air conditioning control of Eco drive mode
On
Off
Daytime running light
system (U.S.A. only)
On
Off
Exhaust gas sensor
sensitivity
0 second
60 seconds
90 seconds
6
Vehicle specifications
Lights
(P. 216)
Standard
577
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Time elapsed before
the interior lights turn
off
Illumination
(P. 365)
Seat belt
reminder
(P. 508)
578
Default setting
Customized
setting
Off
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Off
Time elapsed before
the exterior lights turn
off
15 seconds
Sensitivity of the ambient light sensor used
for dimming the meter
lights etc.
Standard
-2 to 2
Sensitivity of the ambient light sensor used
for brightening the
meter lights etc.
Standard
-2 to 2
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
On
Off
Operation after the
“POWER” switch is
turned OFF
On
Off
Footwell lighting
On
Off
Shift lever lighting
On
Off
Vehicle speed linked
seat belt reminder
buzzer
On
Off
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
6-2. Customization
Settings that can be customized using the navigation system display
You can customize the following settings using the navigation system display.
(For further information on customizing settings using the navigation system display, refer to the Navigation System Owner's Manual.)
Item
Function
Smart access system
Smart access
with push-button start
system with
push-button
start
Door unlock function
(P. 54)
Unlocking operation
Wireless
remote control
(P. 67)
Default setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
All the doors
Driver’s door
Each door
Same side doors
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors unlocked
in one step
Off
6
60 seconds
30 seconds
Vehicle specifications
Time elapsed before
automatic lock function
is activated if door is
not opened after being
unlocked
120 seconds
579
6-2. Customization
Item
Default setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
Off
On
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors.
Off
On
Shifting the shift lever
to “P” unlocks all doors.
On
Off
Shifting the shift lever
to position other than
“P” locks all doors.
On
Off
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors unlocked
in one step
Function
Smart access
system with
push-button
start and
Operation signal
wireless
(Emergency flashers)
remote control (P. 54,
67)
Door lock
(P. 70,
531)
Unlocking using a
mechanical key
Power easy
access system
(P. 98)
580
Driver’s seat movement when exiting the
vehicle
Off
Full
Partial
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Off
Turn signal
lever
(P. 195)
Times of flashing of the
lane change signal
flashers
5
3
7
9
11
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 216)
Air conditioning system
(P. 341)
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically turn off after
doors are closed
-2 to 2
0 second
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
Switching between
outside air and recirculated air mode linked to
“AUTO” switch operation
Auto
Manual
A/C auto switch operation
Auto
Manual
Standard
-3 to 3
On
Off
Exhaust gas sensor
sensitivity
Daytime running light
system (U.S.A. only)
6
Vehicle specifications
Lights
(P. 216)
Standard
581
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Time elapsed before
the interior lights turn
off
Illumination
(P. 365)
582
Default setting
Customized
setting
Off
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Off
Time elapsed before
the exterior lights turn
off
15 seconds
Sensitivity of the ambient light sensor used
for dimming the meter
lights etc.
Standard
-2 to 2
Sensitivity of the ambient light sensor used
for brightening the
meter lights etc.
Standard
-2 to 2
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
For owners
7
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners..................... 584
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 585
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 587
583
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
584
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur
l'épaule, sans pour autant être
en contact avec votre cou ou
glisser de votre épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le
plus droit possible et calez-vous
bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
Guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière extérieurs)
585
7
For owners
Si la sangle diagonale est proche
du cou de la personne, faites
coulisser le guide de confort de
ceinture de sécurité vers l'avant.
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas
entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas
une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture
de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en
cas d'accident.
586
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted
from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions
in English.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS frontaux
Sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur/sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant SRS
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et
du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de l'habitacle
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS de genoux
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant
7
For owners
587
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux et rideau
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants aux
places avant
Sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux arrière (sièges à réglage
électrique)
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants aux
places extérieures arrière
Sacs de sécurité gonflables rideau SRS
Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants
assis aux places extérieures
Sac de sécurité gonflable SRS d'assise de siège (avec siège de
relaxation)
Participe à retenir le passager assis dans le siège de relaxation
588
Composition du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Capteurs de sacs de sécurité
gonflables rideau
Témoin d'alerte SRS
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux arrière
Sac de sécurité gonflable
d'assise de siège
Sac de sécurité gonflable
conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture
de
sécurité
conducteur
Capteur de position du siège
conducteur
Boîtier électronique de sacs
de sécurité gonflables
Capteurs de sacs de sécurité
gonflables frontaux
7
For owners
Système de classification de
l'occupant du siège passager
avant (ECU et capteurs)
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité passager
avant
Sacs de sécurité gonflables de
genoux
Sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
rideau
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux avant
Appuis-têtes actifs
Capteurs des sacs de sécurité
gonflables latéraux et rideau
Témoin indicateur “AIR BAG
ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
589
Votre véhicule est équipé de SACS DE SECURITE GONFLABLES
INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes de
sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208).
Le système de sacs de sécurité gonflables régule la puissance de
déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables conducteur et passager
avant. Le système de sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur comprend le
capteur de position du siège conducteur, etc. Le système de sac de
sécurité gonflable passager avant comprend le capteur de classification
des occupants du siège passager avant, etc.
Les principaux éléments du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
sont illustrés ci-dessus. Le système des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
est commandé par un boîtier électronique. Ce boîtier intègre un capteur
de sécurité et un capteur de sac de sécurité gonflable.
Lorsque la violence du choc frontal ou latéral l'exige, le système de sacs
de sécurité gonflables SRS déclenche les dispositifs pyrotechniques de
gonflage (générateurs de gaz). Une réaction chimique se produit dans
les dispositifs de gonflage, provoquant le remplissage rapide des sacs de
sécurité gonflables avec un gaz non toxique pour amortir le mouvement
des occupants.
590
ATTENTION
■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
591
7
For owners
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les sacs de sécurité gonflables
SRS.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection
complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une force
considérable et peut entraîner la mort ou des blessures graves, particulièrement
si le conducteur se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable. L'autorité
fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la NHTSA (National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille:
La zone à risque du sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur se situant dans les 2 à 3
premiers in. (50 - 75 mm) de déploiement, vous disposez d'une marge de
sécurité confortable en vous plaçant à 10 in. (250 mm) du sac de sécurité
gonflable conducteur pour garantir une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette
distance est mesurée entre le centre du volant de direction et votre sternum. Si
vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position
de conduite de plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège au maximum tout en atteignant confortablement les
pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que la conception des véhicules soit variable, la plupart des conducteurs
peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le siège
conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier
de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre
siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si
votre véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Ceci a pour
effet de diriger le sac de sécurité gonflable vers votre poitrine plutôt que vers
votre tête et votre cou.
Le siège doit être réglé selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en
conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant de direction et la vue des
commandes du tableau de bord.
ATTENTION
■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture
de sécurité à la boucle du siège
conducteur, mais pas à la ceinture de
sécurité proprement dite, le système de
sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur
pense que vous avez attaché votre ceinture
de sécurité, alors qu'en fait c'est faux. Dans
ce cas, il se peut que le sac de sécurité
gonflable SRS conducteur ne se déploie
pas correctement en cas d'accident, et
vous risquez d'être tué ou grièvement
blessé. Veillez donc à porter la ceinture de
sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de
sécurité.
● Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une
violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le passager
se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable. Éloignez le siège passager au
maximum du sac de sécurité gonflable, et réglez le dossier de siège de sorte à
être assis bien droit dans le siège.
● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protégés
peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un sac de sécurité
gonflable. Installez les enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de
sécurité dans un siège de sécurité enfant. Lexus recommande vivement
d'installer tous les nourrissons et enfants aux sièges arrière du véhicule et de
prévoir pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés. C'est à l'arrière que les
nourrissons et les enfants sont les mieux protégés.
● N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège
passager avant, même si le témoin “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé. En cas d'accident,
le déploiement du sac de sécurité gonflable passager avant est si rapide et violent
que l'enfant risquerait d'être blessé grièvement, voire mortellement, si le siège de
sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège passager avant.
592
ATTENTION
■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège
ou ne vous appuyez pas contre la planche
de bord.
● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS
passager avant ou bien s'asseoir sur les
genoux du passager avant.
● Ne conduisez pas le véhicule avec quelque
chose sur les genoux, et n'autorisez pas
non plus le passager à voyager avec
quelque chose sur les genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,
contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
● Interdisez à quiconque de s'agenouiller sur
les sièges passagers en appui contre la
porte ou de sortir la tête ou les mains à
l'extérieur du véhicule.
7
For owners
593
ATTENTION
■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la
planche de bord, la garniture centrale du
moyeu de volant de direction ou la partie
inférieure du tableau de bord.
Au déploiement des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS conducteur, passager avant
et genoux, tout objet risque de se
transformer en projectile.
● N'attachez aucun objet dans les zones
telles que les portes, la vitre de pare-brise,
les vitres de portes latérales, les montants
avant et arrière, le rail latéral de toit ou la
poignée de maintien.
● Ne suspendez aux crochets à vêtements aucun cintre ni aucun objet dur. En cas
de déploiement du sac de sécurité gonflable SRS rideau, ces objets peuvent se
transformer en projectiles capables de vous blesser grièvement, voire de vous
tuer.
● Si un cache en vinyle recouvre la partie où le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS de
genoux se déploie, veillez à l'enlever.
● N'utilisez pour les sièges aucun accessoire venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux et du sac de sécurité
gonflable SRS d'assise de siège, car il risquerait de gêner le déploiement des sacs
de sécurité gonflables SRS.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux parties
renfermant les composants des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, illustrées P. 577.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déclenchement (déploiement) des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, car ils sont
alors encore très chauds.
594
ATTENTION
■ Précautions à observer avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des sacs de sécurité
595
7
For owners
gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou
bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout
résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau.
● Si les parties renfermant les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, telles que la
garniture du moyeu de volant et la garniture de montant avant, apparaissent
abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.
● Il ne faut rien poser sur le siège du passager avant, par exemple un coussin. Cela
a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du
siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter correctement le poids du passager.
En conséquence, le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS passager avant risque de ne
pas se déployer en cas de choc.
■ Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Lexus si vous avez besoin
d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications suivantes.
Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS risquent de ne pas fonctionner correctement
ou de se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi des blessures
graves, voire mortelles.
● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des sacs de sécurité gonflables
SRS
● Réparations, modifications, dépose ou remplacement du volant, du combiné
d'instruments, du tableau de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des
montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit
● Réparations ou modifications de l'aile avant, du bouclier avant ou du côté de
l'habitacle
● Installation d'un chasse-neige, d'un treuil, etc. sur la calandre (pare-buffle, parekangourou, etc.)
● Modification des suspensions du véhicule
● Installation d'appareils électroniques, tels qu'un radioémetteur/récepteur ou d'un
lecteur CD
● Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne
atteinte d'un handicap physique
596
Index
Abbreviation list .....................598
Alphabetical index..................600
What to do if... .........................612
For information regarding the equipment listed below,
refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
• Navigation system
• Audio/video system
597
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
A/C
Air Conditioning
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System
AFS
Adaptive Front-lighting System
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor
APGS
Advanced Parking Guidance System
AWD
All Wheel Drive
CRS
Child Restraint System
DISP
Display
ECO
Economy/Ecology
ECU
Electronic Control Unit
EDR
Event Data Recorder
ELR
Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS
Electric Power Steering
GAWR
Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GPS
Global Positioning System
I/M
Emission Inspection and Maintenance
INFO
Information
LATCH
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LKA
Lane-Keeping Assist
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M+S
Mud and Snow
MTBE
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD
On Board Diagnostics
598
Abbreviation list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
PCS
Pre-Collision System
PWR
Power
RF
Radio Frequency
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
TIN
Tire Identification Number
TPMS
Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC
Traction Control
VDIM
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management
VGRS
Variable Gear Ratio Steering
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
VSC
Vehicle Stability Control
599
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A A/C
Air conditioning filter .........................471
Front air conditioning
system....................................................341
Rear air conditioning system .......355
ABS............................................................ 308
ACCESSORY mode ..........................185
Adaptive front-lighting system......... 218
Advanced parking guidance
system..................................................... 267
AFS .............................................................. 218
Air conditioning filter ............................471
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter .........................471
Front air conditioning
system....................................................341
Rear air conditioning system .......355
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions..........144
Airbag precautions for your
child........................................................ 148
Airbag warning light ....................... 505
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions.............................................145
Curtain shield airbag
precautions ........................................ 148
Front passenger occupant
classification system........................153
600
General airbag precautions..........148
Locations of airbags ..........................140
Modification and disposal of
airbags................................................... 152
Proper driving posture.......... 138, 148
Side airbag operating
conditions ............................................145
Side airbag precautions...................148
SRS airbags............................................140
Alarm.......................................................... 135
Anti-lock brake system......................308
Armrest ....................................................395
Ashtrays....................................................383
Audio system*
Automatic air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter......................... 471
Front air conditioning
system.................................................... 341
Rear air conditioning system.......355
Automatic headlight leveling
system ......................................................219
Automatic high beam ......................... 220
Automatic light control system.........216
AUX port*
Auxiliary box
Auxiliary box.........................................377
Non smokers box..............................376
A/V input port*
Alphabetical index
B Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs .......................484
Wattage .................................................558
Battery
Checking............................................... 452
Hybrid battery
(traction battery) ............................... 40
If the vehicle has a discharged
12-volt battery..................................535
Preparing and checking before
winter .....................................................331
Bluetooth®*
Brakes
Brake hold ..............................................199
Fluid..........................................................450
Parking brake........................................196
Brake assist.............................................308
Brake hold.................................................199
Break-in tips ............................................. 175
C Care
Exterior.................................................... 422
Interior .....................................................425
Seat belts................................................426
Cargo capacity......................................326
Cargo hooks...........................................406
CD player/changer*
Chains .......................................................332
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition ..................158
Booster seats, installation ............... 163
Convertible seats, definition..........158
Convertible seats, installation....... 163
Front passenger occupant
classification system....................... 153
Infant seats, definition........................158
Infant seats, installation ..................... 163
Installing CRS with LATCH
system ................................................... 164
Installing CRS with seat belts........ 166
Installing CRS with top tether
straps ..................................................... 169
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”
601
Alphabetical index
Child safety
Airbag precautions............................ 148
Child restraint system....................... 158
Child-protectors..................................... 71
Heated steering wheel
precautions .......................................390
How your child should wear the
seat belt...................................................112
Installing child restraints ...................163
Moon roof precautions ....................124
Power window lock switch...............121
Power window precautions...........123
Removed electronic key battery
precautions ....................................... 475
Seat belt comfort guide..................... 110
Seat belt extender precautions ..... 115
Seat belt precautions...........................113
Seat heater precautions .................394
Trunk precautions ................................ 78
12-volt battery
precautions ...........................454, 537
Child-protectors ........................................71
Cigarette lighter....................................384
Cleaning
Exterior ................................................... 422
Interior.....................................................425
Seat belts................................................ 426
Climate control seat............................. 391
Climate control seat filter..................473
Clock*
Coat hooks..............................................404
Coin holder ............................................. 372
602
Condenser .............................................. 449
Console box ........................................... 374
Cooling system
Hybrid system overheating.......... 539
Cornering assist sensors...................250
Cruise control
Cruise control......................................233
Dynamic radar cruise
control ..................................................237
Cup holders............................................ 373
Curtain shield airbags ......................... 140
Customizable features....................... 573
D Daytime running light system........... 218
Defogger
Rear window ....................................... 363
Side mirrors.......................................... 363
Dimensions ............................................. 546
Dinghy towing........................................336
Display
Dynamic radar cruise control......237
Energy flow ................................................41
Multi-information display .................. 211
Touch screen ......................................338
Trip information.....................................212
Warning message ..............................514
Do-it-yourself maintenance............. 434
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights ........................ 365
Wattage .................................................558
Door pockets ......................................... 372
Alphabetical index
Doors
Door lock ................................54, 67, 70
Door windows........................................121
Side mirrors..............................................119
Driver's seat belt reminder light ....508
Driving
Break-in tips...........................................175
Correct posture...................................138
Procedures............................................. 174
Winter driving tips ..............................331
Driving position memory ..................... 98
DVD player*
E Eco drive mode........................................ 191
Electric power steering .....................308
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly..............................531
Electronically modulated air
suspension ........................................... 265
Emergency flashers
Switch...................................................... 496
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer
sounds .................................................504
If a warning light turns on ..............504
If a warning message is
displayed..............................................514
If the electronic key does not
operate properly..............................531
If the hybrid system will not
start........................................................ 526
If the parking brake cannot be
released...............................................529
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from “P” .............................................. 528
If the vehicle has a discharged
12-volt battery.................................. 535
If you have a flat tire ...........................517
If you lose your keys............................52
If you think something is
wrong .................................................. 503
If your vehicle becomes
stuck......................................................543
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency .............................544
If your vehicle needs to be
towed....................................................497
If your vehicle overheats ............... 539
Engine
Accessory mode.................................185
Compartment..................................... 440
Engine switch........................................ 184
Hood........................................................437
How to start the hybrid
system ................................................... 184
Identification number .......................547
If the hybrid system will not
start........................................................526
Ignition switch....................................... 184
Overheating ........................................ 539
Power switch......................................... 184
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”
603
Alphabetical index
Engine compartment cover .............. 441
Engine coolant temperature
gauge......................................................202
Engine/power control unit coolant
Capacity.................................................. 551
Checking ............................................... 447
Preparing and checking before
winter......................................................331
Engine oil
Capacity.................................................549
Checking ............................................... 443
Preparing and checking before
winter......................................................331
Engine switch...........................................184
EPS ............................................................ 308
EV drive mode switch..........................188
Event data recorder ...............................30
F
604
First-aid kit storage belt .....................406
Floor mat ................................................. 405
Fluid
Brake........................................................450
Washer.....................................................451
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs........................484
Switch ...................................................... 226
Wattage................................................. 558
Footwell lighting ....................................365
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 484
Switch.......................................................226
Wattage .................................................558
Front passenger occupant
classification system.......................... 153
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light .....................................508
Front seats
Adjustment ...............................................82
Driving position memory ................. 98
Power easy access system ..............101
Seat position memory........................ 98
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 484
Wattage .................................................558
Fuel
Capacity ................................................548
Fuel gauge............................................ 202
Information ...........................................559
Refueling..................................................128
Type .........................................................548
Fuel door................................................... 128
Fuel filler door......................................... 128
Fuses .......................................................... 476
G Garage door opener..........................408
Gauges..................................................... 202
Glove box..................................................371
Alphabetical index
H Hazard lights
Switch...................................................... 496
Head restraints
Active head restraint..........................106
Adjustment ............................................106
Headlight aim ........................................ 482
Headlight cleaner .................................232
Headlights
Automatic high beam ..................... 220
Replacing light bulbs .......................484
Switch........................................................216
Wattage .................................................558
Heaters
Seat heaters............................................391
Side mirrors.......................................... 363
Steering wheel ....................................389
Height control
Electronically modulated air
suspension......................................... 265
Hill-start assist control .......................308
Hood ..........................................................437
Hooks
Cargo......................................................406
Coat .........................................................404
Shopping bag......................................406
Horn.............................................................201
Hybrid system
Emergency shut off system................41
Energy monitor/consumption
screen........................................................41
High voltage components ...............40
Hybrid system indicator .................202
Power switch......................................... 184
I
I/M test......................................................433
Identification
Electric motor ......................................547
Engine......................................................547
Vehicle ....................................................547
Ignition switch.......................................... 184
Illuminated entry system ....................365
Immobilizer system............................... 133
Indicator lights........................................207
Inside rear view mirror .......................... 117
Interior lights
Switch...................................................... 366
Wattage.................................................558
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack................... 438
Vehicle-equipped jack .....................517
Jack handle............................................... 517
605
Alphabetical index
K Keyless entry.............................................. 67
Keys
Electronic key......................................... 49
Engine switch........................................ 184
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ..............................531
If you lose your keys............................ 52
Ignition switch....................................... 184
Key number............................................. 49
Keyless entry........................................... 67
Keys............................................................. 49
Mechanical key...................................... 49
Power switch ........................................ 184
Wireless remote control key.......... 67
606
L
Lane-keeping assist.............................258
Lexus enform*
Light bulbs
Replacing .............................................. 484
Wattage .................................................558
Lights
Door courtesy lights ........................ 365
Emergency flasher switch............. 496
Fog light switch ...................................226
Hazard light switch .......................... 496
Headlight switch.................................. 216
Interior light switch ........................... 366
Outer foot lights................................. 365
Overhead courtesy light ............... 365
Personal light switch.........................367
Replacing light bulbs....................... 484
Shift lever lighting.............................. 365
Turn signal lever...................................195
Vanity lights............................................381
Wattage .................................................558
LKA ............................................................258
Load capacity......................................... 329
Alphabetical index
M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 434
General maintenance.....................430
Maintenance data .............................546
Maintenance requirements.......... 428
Maintenance data.................................429
Meter
Instrument panel light control ..... 204
Meters..................................................... 202
Micro dust and pollen
filter......................................................... 349
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .......................117
Side mirror heaters........................... 363
Side mirrors..............................................119
Vanity mirrors .......................................381
Moon roof ................................................. 124
Multi-information display......................211
N Noise from under vehicle.................... 28
O Odometer............................................... 202
Oil
Engine oil............................................... 443
Opener
Fuel filler door .......................................128
Hood ........................................................437
Trunk............................................................75
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights.................................365
Wattage .................................................558
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding..........................119
Mirror position memory....................98
Outside temperature
display ........................................ 202, 382
Overhead console ............................... 377
Overhead courtesy lights
Overhead courtesy lights............. 365
Wattage.................................................558
Overheating, Hybrid system ...........539
P Parking assist sensors.........................250
Parking brake.......................................... 196
Parking lights
Switch.........................................................216
PCS ............................................................. 315
Pelvic support seat..................................93
Penlight ......................................................518
Personal lights
Switch.......................................................367
Wattage.................................................558
Power outlets .........................................386
Power easy access system ..................101
Power switch ........................................... 184
Power windows ........................................121
Pre-collision system.............................. 315
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”
607
Alphabetical index
R Radar cruise control............................ 237
Radiator ....................................................449
Rear seat
Adjustment...............................................88
Seat position memory ...................... 104
Rear seat entertainment system*
Rear seat relaxation system ................94
Rear sunshade ...................................... 398
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs........................484
Wattage................................................. 558
Rear window defogger.......................363
Replacing
Electronic key battery...................... 474
Fuses ........................................................ 476
Light bulbs.............................................484
Tires............................................................517
Reporting safety defects for U.S.
owners................................................... 584
Retractable table...................................396
S Safety connect ........................................ 414
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt........................ 110
Automatic locking retractor.............. 111
Child restraint system
installation ........................................... 158
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts..................................... 426
Emergency locking retractor ........... 111
How to wear your seat belt........... 109
608
How your child should wear the
seat belt................................................... 112
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use............................................111
Reminder light.....................................508
Seat belt extenders............................... 112
Seat belt pretensioners ......................110
Seat cushion airbag .............................. 140
Seat heaters..............................................391
Seat position memory..................98, 104
Seating capacity.................................... 329
Seats
Adjustment ..................................... 82, 88
Adjustment
precautions................................. 86, 96
Child seat/child restraint system
installation............................................158
Cleaning ................................................ 425
Climate control ....................................391
Climate control seat ..........................391
Driver’s seat position memory ...... 98
Front passenger’s seat
position memory............................... 98
Head restraint .......................................106
Pelvic support seat ...............................93
Power easy access system ..............101
Properly sitting in the seat...............138
Rear seat position memory............104
Rear seat relaxation system .............94
Seat heaters ...........................................391
Seat position memory..............98, 104
Alphabetical index
Service reminder indicators ............207
Shift lever
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P” ...............................528
Transmission..........................................190
Shift lever lighting................................. 365
Shift lock system ................................... 528
Shopping bag hooks........................... 406
Side airbags..............................................140
Side marker lights
Switch........................................................216
Side mirrors
Adjusting and folding ..........................119
Mirror position memory ................... 98
Smart access system with
push-button start
Entry function ......................................... 54
Starting the hybrid system ..............184
“SOS” button ........................................... 414
Spare tire
Inflation pressure ...............................465
Storage location...................................517
Spark plug ............................................... 552
Specifications......................................... 546
Speedometer......................................... 202
Steering wheel
Adjustment ...............................................116
Heated steering wheel ...................389
Lock release...........................................186
Steering wheel position
memory ................................................. 98
Storage feature..................................... 369
Stuck vehicle
If your vehicle becomes
stuck......................................................543
Sun visors ................................................ 380
Sunshades
Rear.......................................................... 398
Rear door................................................ 401
Roof............................................................ 125
Switch
APGS pre-support switch............269
Automatic high beam......................220
Driving mode selector
switch.......................................................191
“ECO MODE” switch .......................191
Emergency flasher switch ............ 496
Engine switch........................................ 184
EV drive mode switch......................188
Fog light switch ...................................226
Hazard light switch .......................... 496
Heated steering wheel
switch................................................... 389
Ignition switch....................................... 184
Light switches ........................................216
Parking brake switch......................... 196
Power door lock switch ....................70
Power switch......................................... 184
Power trunk opener and
closer.......................................................75
Power window switch ........................ 121
Window lock switch............................ 121
Wiper and washer switch..............228
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”
609
Alphabetical index
T
610
Tachometer.............................................202
Tail lights
Switch ........................................................216
Talk switch ...............................................343
Telephone switch*
Theft deterrent system
Alarm .........................................................135
Immobilizer system.............................133
Tire inflation pressure .........................465
Tire information
Glossary.................................................567
Size ...........................................................564
Tire identification number .............563
Uniform tire quality grading.........565
Tires
Chains ..................................................... 332
Checking ...............................................456
If you have a flat tire............................517
Inflation pressure................................465
Information............................................562
Replacing.................................................517
Rotating tires ........................................456
Size ...........................................................556
Snow tires................................................331
Spare tire..................................................517
Tire pressure warning
system..................................................456
Tools............................................................ 517
Total load capacity ...............................329
Touch screen......................................... 338
Towing
Dinghy towing .................................... 336
Emergency towing............................497
Trailer towing ...................................... 335
TRAC ........................................................308
Traction control.....................................308
Transmission
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from “P” ............................... 528
“S” mode.................................................. 192
Transmission..........................................190
Trip meter ................................................ 202
Trunk
Closer .........................................................75
Opener ......................................................75
Trunk light
Wattage .................................................558
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 484
Switch........................................................195
Wattage .................................................558
V Vanity lights
Vanity lights............................................381
Wattage .................................................558
Vanity mirrors ......................................... 381
Variable gear ratio steering.............308
VDIM.........................................................308
Vehicle dynamics integrated
management .......................................308
Vehicle identification number......... 547
Vehicle stability control .....................308
VGRS........................................................308
VSC ...........................................................308
Alphabetical index
W Warning buzzers
Master warning ................................. 508
Open door ......................................... 508
Seat belt reminder ........................... 508
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ..................505
Brake assist system ..........................505
Brake system..........................504, 505
Charging system...............................504
Electric power steering..................505
High coolant temperature........... 508
Low fuel level...................................... 508
Malfunction indicator lamp ..........505
Master warning ................................. 508
Open door .......................................... 508
Pre-collision system.........................505
Pretensioners ......................................505
Seat belt reminder ........................... 508
Slip indicator ........................................505
SRS airbags..........................................505
Tire pressure....................................... 508
Warning messages................................514
Washer
Checking.................................................451
Preparing and checking before
winter .....................................................331
Switch...................................................... 228
Washing and waxing ...........................422
Weight
Cargo capacity .................................. 326
Load limits............................................. 329
Weight....................................................546
Wheels ......................................................469
Window lock switch................................121
Windows
Power windows..................................... 121
Rear window defogger...................363
Washer ...................................................228
Windshield wiper de-icer..................364
Windshield wipers................................228
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery.......................474
Wireless remote control ................... 67
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”
611
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures.
P. 517
If you have a flat tire
P. 526 If the hybrid system will not start
The hybrid system does not start.
P. 133
Immobilizer system
P. 535 If the 12-volt battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out.
P. 528
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from “P”
The high coolant temperature
warning light comes on.
P. 539 If your vehicle overheats
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood.
The key is lost.
612
P. 52
If you lose your keys
What to do if...
The 12-volt battery runs out.
P. 535 If the 12-volt battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked.
P. 70
Doors
The horn begins to sound.
P. 135
Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand.
P. 543 If the vehicle becomes stuck
613
What to do if...
A warning light or indicator
light comes on.
P. 504
If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds...
■Warning lights
Brake system warning light
or
Malfunction indicator lamp
or
P. 504
P. 505
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light
P. 508
“ABS” warning light
or
P. 505
Brake system warning light
P. 505
Low fuel level warning light
P. 508
SRS warning light
P. 505
Open door warning light
P. 508
614
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
P. 508
High coolant temperature
warning light
P. 508
Master warning light
P. 508
Electric power steering system
warning light
P. 505
Tire pressure warning light
P. 508
What to do if...
Charging system warning
light
P. 504
Pre-collision system
warning light*
P. 505
Slip indicator
Cruise control indicator*
P. 505
“AFS OFF” indicator*
P. 505
P. 505
Automatic High Beam
indicator light*
P. 505
*: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
615
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 437
Hood release lever
P. 437
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill 
reference)
Engine oil type
616
Trunk opener
P. 75
Fuel filler door
P. 128
Fuel filler door opener
P. 128
Tire inflation pressure
P. 556
22.2 gal. (84 L, 18.4 Imp. gal.)
Premium unleaded gasoline only
P. 130, 548
P. 556
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
With filter
9.5 (9.0, 7.9)
Without filter
8.9 (8.4, 7.4)
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
P. 549
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement